Configuration - Avaya Support

Configuration - Avaya Support
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs,
Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link
Trunking
Release: 5.3
Document Revision: 05.01
www.nortel.com
NN47205-501
.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Release: 5.3
Publication: NN47205-501
Document release date: 27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008–2009 Nortel Networks
All Rights Reserved.
LEGAL NOTICE
While the information in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable, except as otherwise expressly
agreed to in writing NORTEL PROVIDES THIS DOCUMENT "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF
ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. The information and/or products described in this document are
subject to change without notice.
THE SOFTWARE DESCRIBED IN THIS DOCUMENT IS FURNISHED UNDER A LICENSE AGREEMENT AND
MAY BE USED ONLY IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE TERMS OF THAT LICENSE.
Nortel, Nortel Networks, the Nortel logo, and the Globemark are trademarks of Nortel Networks.
Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
IEEE is a trademark of the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
.
3
.
Contents
Software licence
11
New in this release
15
Features 15
MLT Enable or Disable Whole Trunk 15
MAC Flush 15
Introduction
17
NNCLI command modes 17
VLAN Fundamentals
21
Virtual Local Area Networks 21
IEEE 802.1Q Tagging 22
VLANs Spanning Multiple Switches 28
VLAN Summary 31
VLAN Configuration Rules 32
VLAN Configuration Control 33
MAC Flush 34
MLT Fundamentals
Multi-Link trunks 35
Client-server configuration using Multi-Link trunks 35
Before Trunks are Configured 36
Multi-Link Trunking Configuration Rules 37
MLT load-balancing 38
MLT Enable or Disable Whole Trunk 39
Removal of MLT restrictions 39
Add and delete links from existing Multi-Link trunks 39
How a Multi-Link trunk reacts to losing distributed trunk members
Spanning Tree Considerations for Multi-Link trunks 40
Additional Tips About the Multi-Link Trunking Feature 43
STP Fundamentals
Spanning Tree Protocol groups 45
STG Configuration Guidelines 46
Spanning Tree Fast Learning 48
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
35
39
45
4
STG port membership mode 48
802.1t path cost calculation 48
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol 49
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol 49
Interoperability with legacy STP 50
Differences in STP and RSTP port roles
Rapid convergent 51
BPDU-Filtering 53
50
ADAC Fundamentals
Autodetection and Autoconfiguration of Nortel IP Phones
ADAC operation 56
Autodetection of Nortel IP Phones 56
Autoconfiguration of Nortel IP Phones 57
Initial user settings 58
Port Restrictions 58
Operating modes 59
Dynamic VLAN Autoconfiguration 64
ADAC and stacking 64
ADAC Uplink port as part of trunk 65
ADAC and EAP configuration 66
ADAC User Restrictions 67
ADAC management 68
55
55
LACP and VLACP Fundamentals
69
IEEE 802.3ad Link Aggregation 69
Link aggregation rules 70
VLACP 71
Virtual LACP (VLACP) overview 72
VLACP features 73
Configuring VLANs using the NNCLI
Displaying VLAN information 75
Displaying VLAN interface information 76
Displaying port membership in VLANs 76
Displaying the management VLAN 77
Configuring the management VLAN 77
Deleting the management VLAN IP address 77
Resetting the management VLAN 78
Creating a VLAN 78
Deleting a VLAN 79
Removing a MAC address from allowed flooding 79
Configuring VLAN name 80
Configuring automatic PVID 80
Configuring port VLAN settings 80
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
75
5
Configuring VLAN member ports 81
Configuring VLAN Configuration Control 82
Displaying VLAN Configuration Control settings 83
Modifying VLAN Configuration Control 83
Managing MAC address forwarding database table 84
Displaying the MAC address forwarding table 84
Configuring aging time for unseen MAC addresses 85
Setting aging time for unseen MAC addresses to default 86
Clearing the MAC address table 86
Clearing the MAC address table on a VLAN 86
Clearing the MAC address table on a FastEthernet interface 87
Clearing the MAC address table on a trunk 87
Removing a single address from the MAC address table 88
Configuring Multi-Link Trunking using the NNCLI
89
Displaying MLT configuration 89
Configuring a Multi Link Trunk 89
Displaying STG MLT properties 90
Configuring STP participation for MLTs 90
Enabling all ports shutdown in the MLT 91
Disabling MLT Enable or Disable Whole Trunk feature 91
Displaying the current MLT Enable or Disable Whole Trunk mode of operation
92
Configuring Spanning Tree Protocol using the NNCLI
93
Setting the STP mode using the NNCLI 93
Configuring STP operation mode 93
Configuring STP BPDU Filtering using the NNCLI 93
Creating and Managing STGs using the NNCLI 94
Configuring path cost calculation 94
Configuring STG port membership 95
Displaying spanning tree configuration information 95
Creating a spanning tree group 96
Deleting a spanning tree group 96
Enabling a spanning tree group 96
Disabling a spanning tree group 97
Configuring STP values by STG 97
Restoring default spanning tree value for a STG 98
Setting STP and STG participation 99
Setting default spanning tree values for ports 100
Disable spanning tree for a port 101
Managing RSTP using the NNCLI 102
Configuring RSTP parameters 102
Configuring RSTP parameters per port 103
Displaying RSTP bridge-level configuration details 104
Displaying RSTP port-level configuration details 104
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
6
Configuring RSTP SNMP traps using NNCLI 105
Enable RSTP SNMP traps 105
Reset RSTP SNMP traps settings to default 106
Verifying RSTP SNMP traps settings 106
Managing MSTP using NNCLI 107
Configuring MSTP parameters for CIST Bridge 107
Configuring MSTP parameters for Common Spanning Tree
Configuring MSTP region parameters 109
Configuring MSTP parameters for bridge instance 110
Disabling a MSTP bridge instance 110
Deleting a MSTP bridge instance 111
Displaying MSTP status by selected bridge 111
Displaying MSTP CIST port information 112
Displaying MSTP MSTI settings 112
108
Configuring ADAC using the NNCLI
115
Configuring global ADAC settings 115
Disabling ADAC 116
Restoring default ADAC settings 116
Configuring per port ADAC settings 117
Disable ADAC settings per port 118
Configuring per port ADAC defaults for a specified port 118
Configuring the autodetection method 119
Disabling autodetection 120
Setting autodetection method to default 120
Configuring autodetection for a specified port 121
Disabling autodetection on specified ports 121
Restoring default ADAC setting for ports 121
Adding a range of MAC addresses for autodetection 122
Deleting a range of MAC addresses used by autodetection 122
Resetting supported MAC address ranges 122
Displaying global ADAC settings for a device 123
Displaying ADAC settings per port 123
Displaying configured ADAC MAC ranges 123
Displaying detection mechanism configured per port 124
ADAC UFA configuration example 124
ADAC configuration commands 126
Verifying new ADAC settings 126
Auto configuration settings 126
VLAN settings 126
ADAC settings 126
Configuring LACP and VLACP using the NNCLI
Configuring LACP using the NNCLI 129
Displaying LACP settings 129
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
129
7
Displaying per port LACP configuration information 129
Displaying LACP port statistics 130
Clearing LACP port statistics 130
Displaying port debug information 130
Displaying LACP aggregators or LACP trunks 131
Configuring LACP system priority 131
Enabling port aggregation mode 131
Disabling port aggregation mode 132
Configuring administrative LACP key 132
Configuring LACP mode of operation 133
Configuring per port LACP priority 134
Configuring LACP periodic transmission timeout interval 134
Configuring VLACP using the NNCLI 135
Enabling VLACP 135
Configuring multicast MAC address for VLACP 135
Configuring VLACP parameters per port 135
Disabling VLACP 138
Resetting multicast MAC address for VLACP to default 138
Disabling VLACP on a port 139
Displaying VLACP status 139
Displaying VLACP configuration details for ports 139
Configuring VLANs using Device Manager
141
Setting VLAN Configuration Control 142
Enabling AutoPVID 143
Creating a VLAN 143
Modifying a VLAN 144
Deleting VLANs 145
Diplaying VLAN groups 145
Procedure steps 145
Variable Definitions 146
MAC address table maintenance using Device Manager 146
Flushing the MAC address table 146
Clearing the MAC address table on a FastEthernet interface 147
Clearing the MAC address table on a VLAN 148
Clearing the MAC address table on trunk 148
Clearing a single address from the MAC address table 149
Configuring VLAN port properties 150
Configuring Multi-Link Trunking using Device Manager
Setting up MLTs 153
Adding MLT Ports 154
MultiLink Trunk statistics 154
MultiLink Trunk Ethernet error statistics 156
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
153
8
Configuring Spanning Tree Protocol using Device Manager 159
Setting the STP mode using Device Manager 159
Configuring STP BPDU Filtering using Device Manager 160
Creating and Managing STGs using Device Manager 160
Configuring STG global properties 161
Creating an STG 161
Adding a VLAN to an STG 162
Moving a VLAN between STGs 163
Deleting a STG 163
Displaying STG Status 163
Displaying STG ports 164
Configuring STG port properties 166
Configuring RSTP using Device Manager 167
Viewing the RSTP Globals tab 167
Viewing the RSTP Ports tab 170
Viewing the RSTP Status tab 171
Graphing RSTP Port Statistics 172
Configuring MSTP using Device Manager 173
Viewing the MSTP Globals tab 174
Displaying the CIST Port tab 177
Graphing CIST Port statistics 179
Viewing the MSTI Bridges tab 180
Associating a VLAN with the CIST or an MSTI instance 183
Modifying VLAN CIST or MSTI association 183
Displaying the MSTI Port tab 184
Graphing MSTI Port Statistics 185
Configuring ADAC using Device Manager
187
Configuring global ADAC settings 187
Configuring ADAC MAC address ranges using Device Manager 188
Deleting MAC address ranges using Device Manager 189
Configuring ADAC settings on a port 189
Configuring LACP and VLACP using Device Manager
193
Configuring LACP using Device Manager 193
Configuring Link Aggregation Groups 193
Configuring LACP for ports 194
Configuring VLACP using Device Manager 196
Configuring global VLACP settings 196
Configuring VLACP for ports 197
Configuring VLANs using Web-based Management
Creating a Port-based VLAN 201
Creating a Protocol-based VLAN 202
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
201
9
Modifying a Port-based VLAN 206
Modifying a Protocol-based VLAN 207
Selecting a Management VLAN 208
Deleting a VLAN configuration 208
Accessing VLAN Configuration Control 209
Flushing the MAC address table using Web-based management 209
Configuring Multi-Link Trunking using Web-based
Management
211
Creating a Multi Link trunk 211
Configuring Spanning Tree Group Participation 212
Monitoring an MLT 213
Configuring Spanning Tree Protocol using Web-based
Management
215
Setting the STP mode using Web-based Management 215
Creating and Managing STGs using Web-based Management 215
Creating a Spanning Tree Group 216
Modifying a Spanning Tree Group 217
Deleting a Spanning Tree Group 217
Associating an STG with VLAN Membership 218
Configuring Spanning Tree ports 219
Modifying STG Bridge Information 220
Configuring RSTP using Web-based management 223
Configuring RSTP bridge settings 223
Configuring RSTP port settings 225
Configuring MSTP using Web-based management 226
Creating MSTI instances 226
Configuring MSTI bridge settings 228
Configuring CIST bridge settings 228
Adding VLANs to the MSTI 230
Configuring CIST ports 231
Configuring MSTI port properties 232
Configuring ADAC using Web-based Management
Configuring
Configuring
Configuring
Configuring
Configuring LACP using Web-based Management
Configuring LACP using Web-based management
Configuring LACP bridge properties 239
Configuring LACP ports 240
Displaying LACP port statistics 241
239
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
235
global ADAC properties 235
ADAC port properties 236
ADAC MAC address ranges 237
ADAC Port Detection 238
239
10
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
11
.
Software licence
This section contains the Nortel Networks software license.
Nortel Networks Inc. software license agreement
This Software License Agreement ("License Agreement") is between
you, the end user ("Customer") and Nortel Networks Corporation and
its subsidiaries and affiliates ("Nortel Networks"). PLEASE READ THE
FOLLOWING CAREFULLY. YOU MUST ACCEPT THESE LICENSE
TERMS IN ORDER TO DOWNLOAD AND/OR USE THE SOFTWARE.
USE OF THE SOFTWARE CONSTITUTES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF
THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT. If you do not accept these terms and
conditions, return the Software, unused and in the original shipping
container, within 30 days of purchase to obtain a credit for the full
purchase price.
"Software" is owned or licensed by Nortel Networks, its parent or one of
its subsidiaries or affiliates, and is copyrighted and licensed, not sold.
Software consists of machine-readable instructions, its components, data,
audio-visual content (such as images, text, recordings or pictures) and
related licensed materials including all whole or partial copies. Nortel
Networks grants you a license to use the Software only in the country
where you acquired the Software. You obtain no rights other than those
granted to you under this License Agreement. You are responsible for the
selection of the Software and for the installation of, use of, and results
obtained from the Software.
1. Licensed Use of Software. Nortel Networks grants Customer a
nonexclusive license to use a copy of the Software on only one machine
at any one time or to the extent of the activation or authorized usage level,
whichever is applicable. To the extent Software is furnished for use with
designated hardware or Customer furnished equipment ("CFE"), Customer
is granted a nonexclusive license to use Software only on such hardware
or CFE, as applicable. Software contains trade secrets and Customer
agrees to treat Software as confidential information using the same care
and discretion Customer uses with its own similar information that it does
not wish to disclose, publish or disseminate. Customer will ensure that
anyone who uses the Software does so only in compliance with the terms
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
12 Software licence
of this Agreement. Customer shall not a) use, copy, modify, transfer
or distribute the Software except as expressly authorized; b) reverse
assemble, reverse compile, reverse engineer or otherwise translate the
Software; c) create derivative works or modifications unless expressly
authorized; or d) sublicense, rent or lease the Software. Licensors of
intellectual property to Nortel Networks are beneficiaries of this provision.
Upon termination or breach of the license by Customer or in the event
designated hardware or CFE is no longer in use, Customer will promptly
return the Software to Nortel Networks or certify its destruction. Nortel
Networks may audit by remote polling or other reasonable means to
determine Customer’s Software activation or usage levels. If suppliers of
third party software included in Software require Nortel Networks to include
additional or different terms, Customer agrees to abide by such terms
provided by Nortel Networks with respect to such third party software.
2. Warranty. Except as may be otherwise expressly agreed to in writing
between Nortel Networks and Customer, Software is provided "AS IS"
without any warranties (conditions) of any kind. NORTEL NETWORKS
DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES (CONDITIONS) FOR THE SOFTWARE,
EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND ANY WARRANTY OF
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Nortel Networks is not obligated to provide support
of any kind for the Software. Some jurisdictions do not allow exclusion
of implied warranties, and, in such event, the above exclusions may not
apply.
3. Limitation of Remedies. IN NO EVENT SHALL NORTEL NETWORKS
OR ITS AGENTS OR SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY OF THE
FOLLOWING: a) DAMAGES BASED ON ANY THIRD PARTY CLAIM;
b) LOSS OF, OR DAMAGE TO, CUSTOMER’S RECORDS, FILES OR
DATA; OR c) DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE,
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING LOST PROFITS
OR SAVINGS), WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF THE
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF NORTEL NETWORKS, ITS AGENTS OR
SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THEIR POSSIBILITY. The
foregoing limitations of remedies also apply to any developer and/or
supplier of the Software. Such developer and/or supplier is an intended
beneficiary of this Section. Some jurisdictions do not allow these
limitations or exclusions and, in such event, they may not apply.
4. General
1. If Customer is the United States Government, the following paragraph
shall apply: All Nortel Networks Software available under this License
Agreement is commercial computer software and commercial computer
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Nortel Networks Inc. software license agreement
13
software documentation and, in the event Software is licensed for
or on behalf of the United States Government, the respective rights
to the software and software documentation are governed by Nortel
Networks standard commercial license in accordance with U.S. Federal
Regulations at 48 C.F.R. Sections 12.212 (for non-DoD entities) and
48 C.F.R. 227.7202 (for DoD entities).
2. Customer may terminate the license at any time. Nortel Networks
may terminate the license if Customer fails to comply with the terms
and conditions of this license. In either event, upon termination,
Customer must either return the Software to Nortel Networks or certify
its destruction.
3. Customer is responsible for payment of any taxes, including personal
property taxes, resulting from Customer’s use of the Software.
Customer agrees to comply with all applicable laws including all
applicable export and import laws and regulations.
4. Neither party may bring an action, regardless of form, more than two
years after the cause of the action arose.
5. The terms and conditions of this License Agreement form the complete
and exclusive agreement between Customer and Nortel Networks.
6. This License Agreement is governed by the laws of the country in
which Customer acquires the Software. If the Software is acquired in
the United States, then this License Agreement is governed by the
laws of the state of New York.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
14 Software licence
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
15
.
New in this release
The following section details what’s new in Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch
4500 Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
(NN47205-501) for Release 5.3.
•
“Features” (page 15)
Features
See the following section for information about feature changes:
•
•
“MLT Enable or Disable Whole Trunk” (page 15)
“MAC Flush ” (page 15)
MLT Enable or Disable Whole Trunk
MLT Enable or Disable Whole Trunk feature is to enable or disable MLT or
Distributed MLT (DMLT). For more information see the following:
•
•
•
•
“MLT Enable or Disable Whole Trunk” (page 39)
“Enabling all ports shutdown in the MLT” (page 91)
“Disabling MLT Enable or Disable Whole Trunk feature” (page 91)
“Displaying the current MLT Enable or Disable Whole Trunk mode of
operation” (page 92)
MAC Flush
You can use MAC Flush feature to clear out MAC Addresses from MAC
Address Table. See
•
•
•
“MAC Flush” (page 34)
•
“Clearing the MAC address table on a trunk” (page 87)
“Clearing the MAC address table on a VLAN” (page 86)
“Clearing the MAC address table on a FastEthernet interface” (page
87)
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
16 New in this release
•
•
•
“Removing a single address from the MAC address table” (page 88)
“MAC address table maintenance using Device Manager” (page 146)
“Flushing the MAC address table using Web-based management”
(page 209)
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
17
.
Introduction
This document provides information you need to configure VLANs,
Spanning Tree and Multi-Link Trunking for the Ethernet Routing Switch
4500 Series.
NNCLI command modes
NNCLI provides the following command modes:
•
•
•
•
User EXEC
Privileged EXEC
Global Configuration
Interface Configuration
Mode access is determined by access permission levels and password
protection.
If no password is set, you can enter NNCLI in User EXEC mode and use
the enable command to move to the next level (Privileged EXEC mode).
However, if you have read-only access, you cannot progress beyond User
EXEC mode, the default mode. If you have read-write access you can
progress from the default mode through all of the available modes.
With sufficient permission, you can use the rules in the following table to
move between the command modes.
Command mode and sample
prompt
Entrance commands
Exit commands
User EXEC
No entrance command, default
mode
exit
enable
exit
4526T>
Privileged EXEC
or
logout
or
logout
4526T#
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
18 Introduction
Command mode and sample
prompt
Entrance commands
Exit commands
Global Configuration
configure
To return to Privileged EXEC
mode, enter:
4526T(config)#
end
or
exit
To exit NNCLI completely,
enter:
logout
Interface Configuration
4526T(config-if)#
From Global Configuration
mode:
To configure a port, enter:
interface fastethernet <port
number>
To configure a VLAN, enter:
interface vlan <vlan number>
To return to Global
Configuration mode, enter:
exit
To return to Privileged EXEC
mode, enter:
end
To exit NNCLI completely,
enter:
logout
See Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series Fundamentals
NN47205-102
Navigation
This document contains the following chapters:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
“VLAN Fundamentals” (page 21)
“MLT Fundamentals” (page 35)
“STP Fundamentals” (page 45)
“ADAC Fundamentals” (page 55)
“LACP and VLACP Fundamentals” (page 69)
“Configuring VLANs using the NNCLI” (page 75)
“Configuring Multi-Link Trunking using the NNCLI” (page 89)
“Configuring Spanning Tree Protocol using the NNCLI” (page 93)
“Configuring ADAC using the NNCLI” (page 115)
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Navigation
•
•
•
•
“Configuring LACP and VLACP using the NNCLI” (page 129)
•
•
•
•
“Configuring ADAC using Device Manager” (page 187)
•
“Configuring Spanning Tree Protocol using Web-based Management”
(page 215)
•
•
“Configuring ADAC using Web-based Management” (page 235)
“Configuring VLANs using Device Manager” (page 141)
“Configuring Multi-Link Trunking using Device Manager” (page 153)
“Configuring Spanning Tree Protocol using Device Manager” (page
159)
“Configuring LACP and VLACP using Device Manager” (page 193)
“Configuring VLANs using Web-based Management” (page 201)
“Configuring Multi-Link Trunking using Web-based Management” (page
211)
“Configuring LACP using Web-based Management” (page 239)
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
19
20 Introduction
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
21
.
VLAN Fundamentals
This chapter provides conceptual information relating VLANs, Spanning
Tree, Multi-Link Trunks, and associated features and capabilities.
Virtual Local Area Networks
The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series supports up to 256
VLANs.
You can group ports into broadcast domains by assigning them to the
same VLAN. Frames received in one VLAN can be forwarded only within
that VLAN, and multicast frames and unknown unicast frames are flooded
only to ports in the same VLAN.
Setting up virtual LANs (VLAN) is a way to segment networks to increase
network capacity and performance without changing the physical
network topology (Figure 1 "Port-based VLAN" (page 22)). With network
segmentation, each switch port connects to a segment that is a single
broadcast domain. When you configure a switch port to be a member of
a VLAN, you add it to a group of ports (workgroup) that belong to one
broadcast domain.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
22 VLAN Fundamentals
Figure 1
Port-based VLAN
With the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series , you can assign
ports to VLANs using the command line interface (NNCLI), Web-based
Management interface, or the Device Manager. You can assign different
ports (and associated devices) to different broadcast domains to provide
network flexibility. You can reassign VLANs to accommodate network
moves, additions, and changes, to eliminate the need to change physical
cabling.
IEEE 802.1Q Tagging
The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series operates in accordance
with the IEEE 802.1Q tagging rules. Important terms used with the 32-bit
802.1Q tagging feature are
•
VLAN identifier (VID): the 12-bit portion of the VLAN tag in the frame
header that identifies an explicit VLAN. When other types of VLANs
are enabled, the values enabled in the management interfaces can
override this default value.
•
Port VLAN identifier (PVID): a classification mechanism that associates
a port with a specific VLAN. For example, a port with a PVID of 3
(PVID =3) assigns all untagged frames received on this port to VLAN
3.
•
Tagged frame: a frame that contains the 32-bit 802.1q field (VLAN tag)
and identifies the frame as belonging to a specific VLAN.
•
Untagged frame: a frame that carries no VLAN tagging information in
the frame header.
•
VLAN port members: a group of ports that are all members of a
particular VLAN. A port can be a member of one or more VLANs.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Virtual Local Area Networks
•
Untagged member: a port configured as an untagged member of a
specific VLAN. When an untagged frame exits the switch through an
untagged member port, the frame header remains unchanged. When a
tagged frame exits the switch through an untagged member port, the
tag is stripped and the tagged frame is changed to an untagged frame.
•
Tagged member: a port configured as a tagged member of a specific
VLAN. When an untagged frame exits the switch through a tagged
member port, the frame header changes to include the 32-bit tag
associated with the ingress port PVID. When a tagged frame exits
the switch through a tagged member port, the frame header remains
unchanged (original VID remains).
•
User priority: a three-bit field in the header of a tagged frame. The field
is interpreted as a binary number, therefore has a value of 0 to 7. The
tagged frame uses this field to carry the user-priority across bridged
LANs where the individual LAN segments may be unable to signal
priority information.
•
Port priority: the priority level assigned to untagged frames received
on a port. This value becomes the user priority for the frame. Tagged
packets obtain their user priority from the value in the 32-bit 802.1Q
frame header.
•
Unregistered packet: a tagged frame that contains a VID if the
receiving port is not a member of that VLAN.
•
Filtering database identifier (FID): the specific filtering and forwarding
database within the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series switch
that is assigned to each VLAN. Each VLAN has a filtering database,
which is called independent VLAN learning (IVL). IVLs can have
duplicate MAC addresses in different VLANs.
The default configuration settings for the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch
4500 Series have all ports set as untagged members of VLAN 1 with all
ports configured as PVID = 1. Every VLAN is assigned a unique VLAN
identifier (VID) that distinguishes it from all other VLANs. In the default
configuration example shown in Figure 2 "Default VLAN Settings" (page
24), all incoming packets are assigned to VLAN 1 by the default port
VLAN identifier (PVID =1). Untagged packets enter and leave the switch
unchanged.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
23
24 VLAN Fundamentals
Figure 2
Default VLAN Settings
You can configure switch ports to transmit frames tagged on some VLANs
and untagged on other VLANs.
When you configure VLANs, you can configure the egress tagging of each
switch port as Untag All, Untag PVID Only, Tag All or Tag PVID Only.
In Figure 3 "Port-based VLAN assignment" (page 24), untagged incoming
packets are assigned directly to VLAN 2 (PVID = 2). Port 5 is as a tagged
member of VLAN 2, and port 7 is an untagged member of VLAN 2.
Figure 3
Port-based VLAN assignment
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Virtual Local Area Networks
25
As shown in Figure 4 "802.1Q tagging (after port-based VLAN
assignment)" (page 25), the untagged packet is marked (tagged) as it
leaves the switch through port 5, which is a tagged member of VLAN 2.
The untagged packet remains unchanged as it leaves the switch through
port 7, which is an untagged member of VLAN 2.
Figure 4
802.1Q tagging (after port-based VLAN assignment)
In Figure 5 "Policy-based VLAN assignment" (page 25), untagged
incoming packets are assigned to VLAN 3 (policy VLAN = 3, PVID = 2).
Port 5 is a tagged member of VLAN 3, and port 7 is an untagged member
of VLAN 3.
Figure 5
Policy-based VLAN assignment
As shown in Figure 6 "802.1Q tagging (after policy-based VLAN
assignment)" (page 26), the untagged packet is marked (tagged) as it
leaves the switch through port 5, which is a tagged member of VLAN 3.
The untagged packet remains unchanged as it leaves the switch through
port 7, which is an untagged member of VLAN 3.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
26 VLAN Fundamentals
Figure 6
802.1Q tagging (after policy-based VLAN assignment)
In Figure 7 "802.1Q tag assignment" (page 26), tagged incoming packets
are assigned directly to VLAN 2 because of the tag assignment in the
packet. Port 5 is a tagged member of VLAN 2, and port 7 is an untagged
member of VLAN 2.
Figure 7
802.1Q tag assignment
As shown in Figure 8 "802.1Q tagging (after 32-bit 802.1Q tag
assignment)" (page 27), the tagged packet remains unchanged as it
leaves the switch through port 5, which as a tagged member of VLAN 2.
However, the tagged packet is stripped (untagged) as it leaves the switch
through port 7, which is an untagged member of VLAN 2.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Virtual Local Area Networks
27
Figure 8
802.1Q tagging (after 32-bit 802.1Q tag assignment)
In Figure 9 "802.1Q tag assignment" (page 27), untagged incoming
packets are assigned directly to a PVID of 2. Port 5 is a tagged member of
PVID 2, and port 7 is an untagged member of PVID 2.
Figure 9
802.1Q tag assignment
As shown in Figure 10 "802.1Q tagging (after 30-bit 802.1Q tag
assignment)" (page 28), the untagged packet is marked (tagged) as it
leaves the switch through port 5, which is a tagged member of PVID 2.
The untagged packet remains unchanged as it leaves the switch through
port 7, which is an untagged member of PVID 2.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
28 VLAN Fundamentals
Figure 10
802.1Q tagging (after 30-bit 802.1Q tag assignment)
VLANs Spanning Multiple Switches
You can use VLANs to segment a network within a switch. For multiple
connected switches, you can connect users of one VLAN with users of
that same VLAN in another switch. However, the configuration guidelines
depend on whether both switches support 32-bit 802.1Q tagging.
With 32-bit 802.1Q tagging enabled on a port for a VLAN, all frames
leaving the port for that VLAN are marked as belonging to that specific
VLAN. You can assign switch ports as members of one or more VLANs
that span multiple switches without interfering with the Spanning Tree
Protocol.
VLANs spanning multiple 802.1Q tagged switches
Figure 11 " VLANs spanning multiple 802.1Q tagged switches" (page
29) shows VLANs spanning two Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500
Series switches. The 32-bit 802.1Q tagging is enabled on S1, port 14 and
on S2, port 13 for VLAN 1 and VLAN 2. Both ports are tagged members of
VLAN 1 and VLAN 2.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Virtual Local Area Networks
29
Figure 11
VLANs spanning multiple 802.1Q tagged switches
Because only one link exists between the two switches, the Spanning
Tree Protocol (STP) treats this configuration as it treats any other
switch-to-switch connection. For this configuration to work properly, both
switches must support the 32-bit 802.1Q tagging protocol.
VLANS spanning multiple untagged switches
Figure 12 "VLANs spanning multiple untagged switches" (page 30) shows
VLANs spanning multiple untagged switches. In this configuration, Switch
S2 does not support 32-bit 802.1Q tagging and you must use a single
switch port on each switch for each VLAN.
For this configuration to work properly, you must set spanning tree
participation to Disabled (the STP is not supported across multiple LANs).
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
30 VLAN Fundamentals
Figure 12
VLANs spanning multiple untagged switches
When you enable the STP on these switches, only one link between the
pair of switches forwards traffic. Because each port belongs to only one
VLAN at a time, connectivity on the other VLAN is lost. Exercise care
when you configure the switches to ensure that the VLAN configuration
does not conflict with spanning tree configuration.
To connect multiple VLANs across switches with redundant links, you
must disable the STP on all participating switch ports. Figure 13 "Possible
problems with VLANs and Spanning Tree Protocol" (page 31) shows
possible consequences of enabling the STP when you use VLANs
between untagged (non-802.1Q tagged) switches.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Virtual Local Area Networks
31
Figure 13
Possible problems with VLANs and Spanning Tree Protocol
As shown in Figure 13 "Possible problems with VLANs and Spanning Tree
Protocol" (page 31), with STP enabled, only one connection between
Switch S1 and Switch S2 forwards traffic at any time. Communication
fails between VLAN 2 of S1 and VLAN 2 of S2, blocking communications
between Stations A and B.
The STP selects the link that connects VLAN 1 on Switches S1 and S2 as
the forwarding link based on port speed, duplex-mode, and port priority.
Because the other link that connects VLAN 2 is in Blocking mode, stations
on VLAN 2 in Switch S1 cannot communicate with stations in VLAN 2 on
Switch S2. With multiple links only one link forwards traffic.
VLAN Summary
This section summarizes the VLAN examples discussed in the previous
sections.
As shown in Figure 14 "VLAN configuration spanning multiple switches"
(page 32), Switch S1 is configured with multiple VLANs:
•
•
•
Ports 17, 20, 25, and 26 are in VLAN 1.
Ports 16, 18, 19, 21, and 24 are in VLAN 2.
Port 22 is in VLAN 3.
Because S4 does not support 32-bit 802.1Q tagging, you must use a
single switch port on each switch for each VLAN (see Figure 12 "VLANs
spanning multiple untagged switches" (page 30)).
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
32 VLAN Fundamentals
The connection to S2 requires only one link between the switches because
S1 and S2 are both Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series switches
that support 32-bit 802.1Q tagging (see “ VLANs spanning multiple 802.1Q
tagged switches” (page 28)).
Figure 14
VLAN configuration spanning multiple switches
VLAN Configuration Rules
VLANs operate according to specific configuration rules. When you create
VLANs, consider the following rules that determine how the configured
VLAN reacts in any network topology:
•
If a port is a trunk group member, all trunk members, except those
belonging to a Link Aggregation Group (LAG), are added to or deleted
from the VLAN.
•
All ports involved in trunking must have the same VLAN configuration.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
VLAN Configuration Control
•
•
VLANs do not depend on Rate Limiting settings.
•
If you add a static router port to a different VLAN, you can configure
the port as an IGMP member on that specific VLAN.
33
If a port is an Internet Gateway Management Protocol (IGMP) member
on any VLAN, and you remove the port from a VLAN, the port IGMP
membership is also removed.
VLAN Configuration Control
A switch administrator uses VLAN Configuration Control (VCC) to control
modifications to VLANs. VCC is a superset of the existing AutoPVID
functionality and incorporates this functionality for backwards compatibility.
VCC is globally applied to all VLANs on the switch.
VLAN Configuration Control offers four options to control VLAN
modification:
•
Strict: Restrict the addition of an untagged port to a VLAN if it is
already a member of another VLAN. To add an untagged port to a new
VLAN, the switch administrator must remove the port from all other
VLANs of which it is a member before adding it to the new VLAN. The
PVID of the port is changed to the new VID to which it was added.
ATTENTION
Strict is the factory default setting.
•
Automatic: Automatically add an untagged port to a new VLAN and
automatically remove it from any previous VLAN membership. The
PVID of the port automatically changes to the VID of the VLAN it joins.
Because you first add the port to the new VLAN and then remove it
from any previous membership, the Spanning Tree Group participation
of the port remains enabled as long as the VLANs involved are in the
same Spanning Tree Group.
•
AutoPVID: This option functions in the same manner as previous
AutoPVID functionality. When you add an untagged port to a new
VLAN, you add the port to the new VLAN and the PVID assigned to the
new VID without removing it from previous VLAN memberships. Using
this option, an untagged port can have membership in multiple VLANs.
•
Flexible: This option functions in a similar manner to disabling
AutoPVID functionality. When you use this option, an untagged port
can belong to an unlimited number of VLANs. Any new additions of an
untagged port to a new VLAN does not change the PVID of that port.
VLAN Configuration Control applies only to ports with the tagging modes
of Untag All and Tag PVID Only. VCC does not govern ports with the
tagging modes of Tag All and Untag PVID Only. Ports with the tagging
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
34 VLAN Fundamentals
modes of Tag All and Untag PVID Only can belong to multiple VLANs
regardless of VLAN Configuration Control settings and you must manually
change their PVID.
MAC Flush
You can use the MAC Flush feature to clear MAC Address entries directly
from the MAC Address Table (or Forwarding Data Base). If you do not use
the MAC Flush feature, you can use the following indirect methods:
•
•
•
power cycling the switch
deleting, and then recreating the VLAN
unplugging, and then replugging the port to flush out all addresses
learned on the port
MAC Flush provides the following options to flush out MAC Address
entries:
•
•
•
•
clear a single MAC Address
clear all MAC addresses from a port (or list of ports)
clear all MAC addresses from a trunk (MLT or LAG)
clear all MAC addresses from a particular VLAN or all MAC addresses
MAC Flush clears only dynamically learned MAC Addresses. MAC Fush
does not delete MAC Addresses created by MAC Security or Port Mirroring
because deletion of these MAC Addresses can affect the MAC Security or
Port Mirroring function.
MAC Addresses for MAC Security or Port Mirroring have one of the
following identifiers:
•
•
•
AGELOCK
SECRET
STATIC
Higher priority tasks can delay MAC Address clearing.
You can configure MAC Flush in NNCLI, SNMP, Device Manager, and
Web-based Management.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
35
.
MLT Fundamentals
Multi-Link trunks
With Multi-Link trunks, you can group up to four switch ports to form a
link to another switch or server, thus increasing aggregate throughput of
the interconnection between the devices (up to 4 Gigabits in full-duplex
mode). You can configure up to eight Multi-Link trunks. The trunk
members can reside on a single unit or on multiple units within the same
stack configuration as a distributed trunk. Multi-Link Trunking software
detects misconfigured (or broken) trunk links and redirects traffic on the
misconfigured or broken trunk link to other trunk members within that trunk.
You can use the Command Line Interface (NNCLI), Web-based
Management interface, or Device Manager (DM) to create switch-to-switch
and switch-to-server Multi-Link trunk links.
Client-server configuration using Multi-Link trunks
Figure 15 "Client/server configuration example" (page 36) shows an
example of how you can use Multi-Link Trunking in a client/server
configuration. In this example, both servers connect directly to Switch
S1. FS2 is connected through a trunk configuration. The switch-to-switch
connections are through trunks.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
36 MLT Fundamentals
Figure 15
Client/server configuration example
Clients who access data from the servers (FS1 and FS2) use maximum
bandwidth through trunks T1, T2, T3, T4, and T5. Trunk members (the
ports that make up each trunk) need not be consecutive switch ports; ports
can be selected randomly, as shown by T5.
With spanning tree enabled, one trunk (T2 or T3) acts as a redundant
(backup) trunk to Switch S2. With spanning tree disabled, you must
configure trunks T2 and T3 into separate VLANs for this configuration to
function properly.
Before Trunks are Configured
When you create and enable a trunk, the trunk members (switch ports)
take on certain settings necessary for the correct operation of the
Multi-Link Trunking feature.
Before you configure a Multi-Link trunk, consider the following settings and
specific configuration rules:
1. Read the configuration rules provided in the next section, “ Multi-Link
Trunking Configuration Rules” (page 37).
2. Determine which switch ports (up to four) are to become trunk
members (the specific ports that make up the trunk). Each trunk
requires a minimum of two ports.
ATTENTION
With release 5.0 software, disabled ports can belong to MLTs. For traffic to
flow to your configured MLT ports, be sure you enable them.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Multi-Link trunks 37
3. Ensure that the trunk member ports have the same VLAN
configuration.
4.
To avoid configuration errors, all network cabling must be complete
and stable before you configure any trunks.
ATTENTION
If trunk ports are STP-enabled, ensure that all potential trunk members
are connected to their corresponding members; otherwise, STP cannot
converge correctly, and traffic loss can result.
5. Consider how the existing spanning tree reacts to the new trunk
configuration.
ATTENTION
If potential trunk ports are connected and STP is disabled on these ports, a
loop is formed; to avoid this situation, enable the trunk before you disable
STP.
6. Consider how the addition of a trunk will affect existing VLANs.
Multi-Link Trunking Configuration Rules
The Multi-Link Trunking feature is deterministic; that is, it operates
according to specific configuration rules. When you create trunks, consider
the following rules that determine how the Multi-Link trunk reacts in any
network topology:
•
With release 5.0 software, disabled ports can belong to MLTs. For
traffic to flow to your configured MLT ports, be sure that you enable
them (set to Enabled through the Port Configuration screen or through
network management).
•
All trunk members must have the same VLAN configuration before you
set the Trunk Status field on the Trunk Configuration screen to Enabled
using the NNCLI.
•
When you configure an active port in a trunk, the port becomes a trunk
member when the Trunk Status field is Enabled. The spanning tree
parameters for the port then change to reflect the new trunk settings.
•
If you change the spanning tree participation of any trunk member to
Enabled or Disabled, the spanning tree participation of all members of
that trunk changes similarly.
•
If you change the VLAN settings of any trunk member, the VLAN
settings of all members of that trunk change similarly.
•
•
A MLT/DMLT/LAG member can not be configured as a monitor port.
A monitor port cannot monitor entire trunks; the monitor port can
monitor trunk members.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
38 MLT Fundamentals
•
All trunk members must have identical Internet Gateway Management
Protocol (IGMP) configurations.
•
If you change the IGMP snooping configuration for any trunk member,
the IGMP snooping settings for all trunk members change.
•
Nortel recommends that you do not enable MAC Address Security on
trunk ports.
•
MLT ports can participate in different STGs. They must have the same
spanning tree learning in every group but not necessarily the same
learning between different groups to consistently update their state in
the port driver.
•
Like normal ports, MLT ports can participate with different spanning
tree learning for different spanning tree groups. Trunk ports that are in
multiple spanning tree groups must be tagged, and all MLT members
must belong to the same spanning tree group.
MLT load-balancing
Release 5.0 and higher supports MAC-based (basic) load-balancing. You
can configure this option using the NNCLI.
The 4500 Series switch uses the following formula to perform MLT
load-balancing:
Index = DA[42:40]^DA[34:32]^DA[26:24]^DA[18:16]^DA[10:8]^DA[2:0]^SA[
42:40]^SA
[34:32]^SA[26:24]^SA[18:16]^SA[10:8]^SA[2:0]^VLAN[10:8]^VLAN[2:0]^Eth
ertype
[10:8]^Ethertype[2:0]^SRC_MODID[2:0]^SRC_PORT_TGID[2:0]
Table 1
Formula variables
Variable
Definition
^
XOR operator
DA
Destination MAC Address
SA
Source MAC Address
VLAN
VLAN tag
Ethertype
Ethernet Type Field
SRC_MODID
ASIC system number identifier
SRC_PORT_TGID
Ingress port number or the trunk number (zero based).
The port number is the ASIC port number, not the front
panel port number.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Multi-Link trunks 39
MLT Enable or Disable Whole Trunk
The MLT Enable or Disable Whole Trunk feature is user-configurable
switch-wide. The feature is in a disabled state by default. When you
the enable or disable MLT or DMLT groups, the operational state of the
links that make up the bundle are not changed by default. When you
disable MLT or DMLT groups, a traffic loop within a network can occur.
The Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 supports the ability to change this
operational mode using the MLT Enable or Disable Whole Trunk capability.
If you enable the MLT Enable or Disable Whole Trunk functionality, the
underlying state of the port changes to reflect the state of the MLT or
DMLT bundle irrespective of their previous status. Similarly, if you disable
the MLT or DMLT then all links that are part of the MLT group are disabled
with the exception of the Destination Lookup Failure (DLF) link. The DLF
link is typically the lowest numbered port of a MLT or DMLT link.
You can enable or disable individual links of a MLT or DMLT when you
enable the MLT Enable or Disable Whole Trunk functionality.
ATTENTION
For network configuration, Nortel recommends that you set the MLT Enable or
Disable Whole Trunk functionality to enabled.
Removal of MLT restrictions
If you disable any MLT or DMLT trunk member, the member is not
removed from the MLT or DMLT group. The port remains a member of the
MLT or DMLT group until it is removed from configuration.
Add and delete links from existing Multi-Link trunks
You cannot add or remove ports from a Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch
4500 Series switch MLT, unless you first disable MLT. Disabling MLT does
not disable the ports assigned to the MLT. The ports form separate links
and create a network loop.
How a Multi-Link trunk reacts to losing distributed trunk members
A Multi-Link trunk (Figure 16 " Loss of distributed trunk member" (page
40)) can cover separate units in a stack configuration. If a unit in the stack
becomes inactive due to loss of power or unit failure, the unaffected trunk
members remain operational.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
40 MLT Fundamentals
Figure 16
Loss of distributed trunk member
However, until you correct the cause of the failure or change the trunk
Status field to Disabled, you cannot modify any of the following parameters
for the affected trunk.
•
•
•
•
VLAN configuration
spanning tree configuration
Port configuration
IGMP configuration
In addition, Nortel recommends that you do not modify Rate Limiting until
you correct the cause of failure or disable the trunk.
Spanning Tree Considerations for Multi-Link trunks
The spanning tree Path Cost parameter is recalculated based on the
aggregate bandwidth of the trunk. For example, Figure 17 "Path Cost
Arbitration" (page 41) shows a two-port trunk (T1) with two port members
that operate at an aggregate bandwidth of 2 GB, with a comparable Path
Cost of 1. Trunk 2 has two ports at 100 Mb/s with a Path Cost of 5.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Multi-Link trunks 41
Figure 17
Path Cost Arbitration
When the Path Cost calculations for both trunks are equal, the software
chooses the trunk that contains the lowest numbered port as the
forwarding path.
ATTENTION
The default spanning tree Path Cost for all gigabit ports is always equal to 1.
When configuring trunks, be aware that when adding a one-gigabit link in front
of another trunk, the trunk becomes blocked because both the link and trunks
have a Path Cost of 1.
The switch can detect trunk member ports that are physically
misconfigured. For example, in Figure 18 "Correctly Configured Trunk"
(page 42), trunk member ports 2, 4, and 6 of Switch S1 are configured
correctly to trunk member ports 7, 9, and 11 of Switch S2. The show
spanning-tree port command output for each switch shows the port
state field for each port in the Forwarding state.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
42 MLT Fundamentals
Figure 18
Correctly Configured Trunk
ATTENTION
Cost varies with port speed. For example, the cost for a 1 Gb/s port is 1, while
the cost for a 100 Mb/s port is 3.
If trunk member port 11 of root Switch S2 is physically disconnected and
then reconnected to port 13, the show spanning-tree port command
output for Switch S1 changes to show port 6 in the Blocking state (Figure
19 "Detecting a Misconfigured Port " (page 43))
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Multi-Link trunks 43
Figure 19
Detecting a Misconfigured Port
ATTENTION
If the port speed is 100 Mb/s, then the STP cost for trunk members on S2 is 5.
Additional Tips About the Multi-Link Trunking Feature
When you create a Multi-Link trunk , the individual trunk members (the
specific ports that make up the trunk) logically connect and react as a
single entity. For example, if you change spanning tree parameters for
any trunk member, the spanning tree parameters for all trunk members
change.
To change port membership in Multi-Link Trunking, you must perform this
procedure:
1. Disable the trunk.
2. Make the change.
3. Reenable the trunk.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
44 MLT Fundamentals
All configured trunks are indicated in the Spanning Tree Configuration
screen. The Trunk field lists the active trunks that are adjacent to the port
numbers that correspond to the specific trunk member for that trunk.
When you change a Spanning Tree parameter for one trunk member, the
modification affects all trunk members.
Management stations view the trunk as a single spanning tree port. The
spanning tree port is represented by the trunk member with the lowest port
number. For example, if ports 13, 14, 15, and 16 are trunk members of
trunk T1, the management station views trunk T1 as spanning tree port 13.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
45
.
STP Fundamentals
Spanning Tree Protocol groups
The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series supports the Spanning
Tree Protocol (STP) as defined in IEEE 802.1D. The Spanning Tree
Protocol detects and eliminates logical loops in a bridged or switched
network. When multiple paths exist, the spanning tree algorithm configures
the network so that a bridge or switch uses only the most efficient path. If
that path fails, the protocol automatically reconfigures the network activate
another path, thus sustaining network operations.
The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series supports multiple
spanning tree groups (STG). The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500
Series supports a maximum of eight STGs, either all in one stand-alone
switch or across a stack. Multiple STGs provide multiple data paths,
which can be used for load-sharing and redundancy. Enable load sharing
between two switches using multiple STGs by configuring each path with a
different VLAN and then assigning each VLAN to a separate STG. Each
STG is independent. Each STG sends its own Bridge Protocol Data Units
(BPDU), and you must independently configure each STG.
The STG, or bridge group, forms a loop-free topology that includes one
or more virtual LANs (VLAN). The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500
Series supports multiple instances (eight) of STGs that run simultaneously.
The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series supports a maximum of
256 VLANs. With a maximum of 8 STGs, on average, each STG can have
32 VLANs.
In the default configuration of the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500
Series, a single STG with the ID of 1 includes all ports on the switch. This
STG is the default STG. Although you can add ports or delete ports from
the default STG, you cannot delete the default STG (STG1) itself from the
system. Also you cannot delete the default VLAN (VLAN1) from STG1.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
46 STP Fundamentals
The tagging for the BPDUs from STG1, or the default STG, is
user-configurable (as are tagging settings for all STGs). However, by
default STG1 sends only untagged BPDUs to operate with all devices that
support only one instance of STP. (By default, STG2 through STG8 are
tagged.) The tagging setting for each STG is user-configurable.
ATTENTION
If the STG tags a BPDU, the BPDU packet is tagged only on a tagged port.
Also, ensure that the Filter Unregistered Frames option is disabled on the
tagged port for this to function properly.
You must create all other STGs, except the Default STG. To become
active, you must enable each STG after its creation. Each STG is
assigned an ID number from 2 to 8 (the Default STG is assigned the ID
number 1). Ports or VLANs are assigned to an active STG. However, a
port that is not a member of a VLAN cannot join an STG.
When you create an STG, all ports that belong to any assigned VLAN are
automatically added to the STG.
Disable and delete an STG when you no longer need it. The procedure
is to disable the STG, delete all VLAN and port memberships, and then
delete the STG.
A unique multicast address can be configured for STGs 1 to 4.
ATTENTION
When configuring a unique multicast address for an STG, each device in that
STG must be configured with the same spanning tree multicast address.
STG Configuration Guidelines
This section provides important information about configuring STGs:
•
You must create an STG must by preforming these steps:
— Create the STG.
— Add the existing VLAN and port memberships.
— Enable the STG.
•
When you create a VLAN, that VLAN automatically belongs to STG 1,
the default STG. If the VLAN is to be in another STG, move the VLAN
by assigning it to another STG.
•
You must move a newly created VLAN to an existing STG by
performing these steps:
— Create the VLAN.
— Add the VLAN to an existing STG.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Spanning Tree Protocol groups
47
•
•
You cannot move or delete VLAN1 from STG1.
•
You cannot add a port that is a member of no VLAN to any STG. You
must add the port must to a VLAN, and add that VLAN to the desired
STG.
•
Tagged ports can belong to more than one STG, but untagged ports
can belong to only one STG.
•
When a tagged port belongs to more than one STG, the egress BPDUs
are tagged to distinguish the BPDUs of one STG from those of another
STG.
•
Because some STP-compliant devices do not support tagging, you
can configure whether to send tagged or untagged BPDUs, even from
tagged ports. The VLAN ID for the tagged BPDUs is 4000+STG ID.
•
The default VLAN ID for tagged BPDUs is as follows:
VLANs must be in a single STG; a VLAN cannot span multiple STGs.
By confining VLANs within a single STG, you avoid problems with
spanning tree blocking ports and loss of connectivity within the VLAN.
When a VLAN spans multiple switches, the VLAN must be within the
same spanning tree group (have the same STG ID) across all the
switches.
— 4001--STG1
— 4002--STG2
— 4003--STG3
— 4004--STG4
— 4005--STG5
— 4006--STG6
— 4007--STG7
— 4008--STG8
•
You can select a VLAN ID for tagged BPDUs for each STG. Valid
VLAN IDs are 1 to 4094.
•
•
•
Tagged BPDUs cannot use the same VID as an active VLAN.
•
As an example, assume that port 1 belongs to VLAN1, and that
VLAN1 belongs to STG1. When you remove port 1 from VLAN1, port 1
is also removed from STG1. However, if port 1 belongs to both VLAN1
and VLAN2 and both VLANs belong to STG1, removing port 1 from
An untagged port cannot span multiple STGs.
When you remove a port from a VLAN that belongs to an STG, that
port is also removed from the STG. However, if that port belongs to
another VLAN in the same STG, the port remains in the STG.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
48 STP Fundamentals
VLAN1 does not remove port 1 from STG1 because VLAN2 is still a
member of STG1.
•
•
You must disable an STG before you can delete it.
You can configure a unique multicast address for STGs 1 to 4 only.
Spanning Tree Fast Learning
Spanning Tree Fast Learning is an enhanced port mode supported by the
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series. If you enable Spanning Tree
Fast Learning on a port with no other bridges, the port starts more quickly
after a switch initialization or a spanning tree change. The port passes
through the normal blocking and learning states before the forwarding
state, but the hold times for these states is the bridge hello timer (2
seconds by default) instead of the bridge forward delay timer (15 seconds
by default).
The port configured with Fast Learning can forward data immediately, as
soon as the switch learns that the port is enabled.
Fast Learning is intended for access ports in which only one device is
connected to the switch (as in workstations with no other spanning tree
devices). For these ports, it is not desirable to wait the usual 30 to 35
seconds for spanning tree initialization and bridge learning.
ATTENTION
Use Spanning Tree Fast Learning with caution. This procedure is contrary to
that specified in the IEEE 802.1D standard for Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)
in which a port enters the blocking state after the initialization of the bridging
device or after a return from the disabled state when you enable the port through
configuration.
STG port membership mode
In release 5.0 software and later, IEEE 802.1D STGs support two different
STP port membership modes: normal and automatic. In the normal mode,
when you assign a port to VLAN X and VLAN X is in STP group Y, the port
does not automatically become a member of STP group Y. In automatic
mode, when you assign a port to VLAN X and VLAN X is in STP group Y,
the port automatically becomes a member of STP group Y.
802.1t path cost calculation
In release 5.0 software and later, you can set the switch to calculate the
STG path cost using either the IEEE 802.1d standard or the IEEE 802.1t
standard. The 802.1t standard is a maintenance extension to the 802.1d
standard.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
49
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
The standard Spanning Tree implementation in 4500 Series switches is
based on IEEE 802.1d. This implementation results in a slow response
to a topology change in the network (for example, a dysfunctional link in
a network).
The Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP or IEEE 802.1w) reduces
recovery time after a network breakdown. RSTP also maintains a
backward compatibility with the IEEE 802.1d, which was the Spanning
Tree implementation prior to RSTP. In certain configurations, you can
reduce the recovery time of RSTP to less than 1 second. Maintain the
backward compatibility by configuring a port to be in STP-compatible
mode. A port that operates in the STP-compatible mode transmits and
receives only STP BPDUs and drops any RSTP BPDUs.
RSTP also reduces the amount of flooding in the network by enhancing
the way the Topology Change Notification (TCN) packet is generated.
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
You can use the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP or IEEE 802.1s)
to configure multiple instances of RSTP on the same switch. Each RSTP
instance can include one or more VLANs. The operation of the MSTP is
similar to the current Nortel proprietary MSTP.
The 4500 switch uses RSTP and MSTP to achieve the following:
•
Reduce converging time from 30 seconds to less than 2 seconds when
a topology change occurs in the network (that is, the port goes up or
down).
•
Eliminate unnecessary flushing of the MAC database and flooding of
traffic to the network with a new Topology Change mechanism.
•
Obtain backward compatibility with other switches that run legacy
802.1d STP or Nortel MSTG (STP group 1 only).
•
Under MSTP mode, simultaneously support eight instances of RSTP.
Instance 0 or CIST is the default group, which includes default VLAN 1.
Instances 1 to 7 are called MSTIs 1-7.
•
Run Nortel MSTG, RSTP, or MSTP.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
50 STP Fundamentals
Interoperability with legacy STP
RSTP provides a new parameter ForceVersion for backward compatibility
with legacy STP. You can configure a port in either STP-compatible or
RSTP mode.
•
An STP-compatible port transmits and receives only STP BPDUs. Any
RSTP BPDU that the port receives in this mode is discarded.
•
An RSTP-compatible port transmits and receives only RSTP BPDUs. If
an RSTP port receives an STP BPDU, it becomes an STP port. User
intervention is required to return this port to RSTP mode. This process
is called Port Protocol Migration.
Differences in STP and RSTP port roles
RSTP is an enhanced version of STP. These two protocols have similar
parameter sets.
Table 2 "Differences in port roles for STP and RSTP" (page 50) lists the
differences in port roles for STP and RSTP. STP supports two port roles,
while RSTP supports four port roles.
Table 2
Differences in port roles for STP and RSTP
Port Role
STP
RSTP
Description
Root
Yes
Yes
This port receives a better BPDU than its
own and has the best path to reach the
Root. Root port is in Forwarding state.
Designated
Yes
Yes
This port has the best BPDU on the
segment. The Designated port is in
Forwarding state.
Alternate
No
Yes
This port receives a better BPDU than its
own and a Root port exists within the same
switch. The Alternate port is in Discarding
state.
Backup
No
Yes
This port receives a better BPDU than its
own from another port within the same
switch. The Backup port is in Discarding
state.
Edged Port
RSTP supports the Edged Port parameter. When a port is connected to a
nonswitch device such as a PC or a workstation, you must configure the
port as an Edged port for fast convergence. An active Edged port goes
directly to Forwarding state with no delay. An Edged port becomes a
non-Edged port if it receives a BPDU.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
51
Path cost values
RSTP and MSTP recommend new path cost values that support a wide
range of link speeds. Table 3 "Recommended path cost values" (page
51) lists the recommended path cost values.
Table 3
Recommended path cost values
Link speed
Recommended value
Less than or equal to 100 Kb/s
200 000 000
1 Mb/s
20 000 000
10 Mb/s
2 000 000
100 Mb/s
200 000
1 Gb/s
20 000
10 Gb/s
2 000
100 Gb/s
200
1 Tb/s
10 Tb/s
20
2
Rapid convergent
With RSTP and MSTP, the environment root port or the designated port
can request permission from a peer to enter the Forwarding State. If the
peer grants permission, then the root port moves to the Forwarding State
with no delay. This procedure is called the Negotiation Process.
With RSTP and MSTP, information received on a port can be sent
immediately if the port malfunctions, instead of waiting for the Maximum
Age time.
The following example illustrates how an RSTP port state moves rapidly to
Forwarding state without the risk of creating a loop in the network.
Switch A: Ports 1 and 2 are full duplex. Port 2 is an Edged port.
Switch B: Ports 1, 2, and 3 are full duplex. Port 2 is an Edged port.
Switch C: Ports 1 and 2 are full duplex. Port 2 is an Edged port.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
52 STP Fundamentals
Switch A is the Root.
Negotiation Process
After ports power up, they ports assume the role of Designated ports. All
ports are in the Discarding state, except for Edged ports. Edged ports
directly enter the Forwarding state with no delay.
Switch A port 1 and switch B port 1 exchange BPDUs, and switch A is
the Root and switch A port 1 is the Designated port. Switch B learns that
switch A has high priority. Switch B port 1 becomes the Root port. Both
switch A port 1 and switch B port 1 remain in the Discarding state.
Switch A starts negotiating by sending a BPDU with a proposed bit set.
Switch B receives the proposed BPDU and sets its non-Edge ports to the
Discarding state. This operation is the synchronization process.
Switch B sends a BPDU with the agreement bit set to switch A.
Switch A sets port 1 to Forwarding, and switch B sets port 1 to Forwarding.
PC 1 and PC 2 can communicate with each other.
•
The negotiation process now moves down to switch B port 3 and its
partner port.
•
PC 3 cannot communicate with either PC 1 or PC 2 until the
negotiation process between switch B and switch C is complete.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
BPDU-Filtering
53
Figure 20
Negotiation process
The RSTP convergent time depends on how quickly the switch can
exchange BPDUs during negotiation and the number of switches in the
network. For a 4500 Series switch, the convergent time depends on the
hardware platform and the number of active applications that run on the
switch.
BPDU-Filtering
Ethernet Switches 4500 series support the BPDU-Filtering feature for
STPG, RSTP, and MSTP.
The Spanning Tree Protocol detects and eliminates logical loops in a
bridged or switched network. Any bridge that participates in the spanning
tree exchanges information with other bridges using configuration
messages known as Bridge Protocol Data Units (BPDU). Based on the
BPDU information exchange, the bridge with the lowest bridge ID becomes
the root. This process is called the root selection process.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
54 STP Fundamentals
Typically, after a new bridge joins the spanning tree or an existing bridge
leaves the spanning tree, the root selection process is repeated and a new
root is selected.
The BPDU-Filtering feature allows the network administrator to achieve
the following:
•
Block an unwanted root selection process after an edge device, such
as a laptop running Linux and enabled with STP, is added to the
network. This prevents unknown devices from influencing an existing
spanning tree topology.
•
Block the flooding of BPDUs from an unknown device.
ATTENTION
The STP BPDU-Filtering feature is not supported on Multi-Link Trunk (MLT)
ports.
If a port has BPDU-Filtering enabled and it receives an STP BPDU, the
following actions take place:
•
•
The port is immediately put in the operational disabled state.
A trap is generated and the following log message is written to the log:
BPDU received on port with BPDU-Filtering enabled. Port <x>
has been disabled.
•
•
The port timer starts.
The port stays in the operational disabled state until the port timer
expires.
If the timer is disabled or the switch is reset before the timer expires,
the port remains in the disabled state. Similarly, if a user disables
BPDU-Filtering while the timer is running, the timer is stopped and that
port stays in the disabled state. In this case, you must then manually
enable the port to bring it back to the normal mode.
You can enable and disable the BPDU-Filtering feature on a per-port
basis. The BPDU-Filtering timer is user-configurable for each port and
has a valid range of between 10 and 65 535 seconds. The port timer is
disabled if it is configured as 0.
For details on configuring BPDU Filtering, see “Configuring STP BPDU
Filtering using the NNCLI” (page 93) and “Configuring STP BPDU Filtering
using Device Manager” (page 160).
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
55
.
ADAC Fundamentals
Autodetection and Autoconfiguration of Nortel IP Phones
Ethernet Switch software supports Autodetection and Autoconfiguration
(ADAC) of Nortel IP Phones. With ADAC, you can automatically configure
the switch to support and prioritize IP Phone traffic.
When ADAC is enabled and a Nortel IP Phone is connected to the switch,
the switch automatically configures the VLAN, port, and Quality of Service
(QoS) settings necessary for the transmission of signal and voice between
the Nortel IP Phone and the switch.
ADAC can configure the switch whether the switch is directly connected to
the Call Server (through the Call Server port) or is indirectly connected to
the Call Server using a network uplink (through the Uplink port).
ADAC has three separate operating modes to meet the requirements of
different networks:
•
Untagged-Frames-Basic:
Use this mode when you want a basic configuration only and the IP
Phones are sending untagged traffic.
•
Untagged-Frames-Advanced:
Use this mode when you want an advanced configuration and
the IP Phones are sending untagged traffic. In this mode, ADAC
creates a Voice VLAN that includes the Call Server or Uplink port, as
applicable, and all telephony ports. All tagging, PVID settings, and
traffic prioritization are configured automatically.
•
Tagged Frames:
Use this mode when you want an advanced configuration and the
IP Phones are sending tagged traffic. This mode provides the same
configuration as the Untagged-Frames-Advanced mode, but with
tagged frames. As with the Untagged-Frames-Advanced mode, ADAC
creates a Voice VLAN that includes the Call Server or Uplink port,
as applicable, and all telephony ports. While Traffic prioritization
is configured automatically, tagging and PVID settings are user
configurable.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
56 ADAC Fundamentals
ADAC operation
The following sections provide detailed explanations of ADAC operation.
Autodetection of Nortel IP Phones
When a Nortel IP Phone is connected to a switch and is powered on,
the switch automatically detects the IP Phone, and can then begin the
Autoconfiguration of the IP Phone.
Autodetection of the Nortel IP Phones is performed based on the MAC
address of the connected IP Phone. When the feature is enabled on a
port, the switch checks all MAC addresses of received packets on the port.
If a received MAC address falls within the range of known Nortel IP Phone
MAC addresses, ADAC determines that the specified port is connected to
a Nortel IP Phone and initiates the required configuration.
Ethernet Switches 4500 series have a default range of MAC addresses
that are recognized as Nortel IP Phones by ADAC. You can change
these default MAC address ranges using the NNCLI, dm, or Web-based
management.
The default MAC address range is as follows:
Table 4
Default IP Phone MAC address ranges for ADAC
From (low end)
→
To (high end)
00-0A-E4-01-10-20
→
00-0A-E4-01-23-A7
00-0A-E4-01-70-EC
→
00-0A-E4-01-84-73
00-0A-E4-01-A1-C8
→
00-0A-E4-01-AD-7F
00-0A-E4-01-DA-4E
→
00-0A-E4-01-ED-D5
00-0A-E4-02-1E-D4
→
00-0A-E4-02-32-5B
00-0A-E4-02-5D-22
→
00-0A-E4-02-70-A9
00-0A-E4-02-D8-AE
→
00-0A-E4-02-FF-BD
00-0A-E4-03-87-E4
→
00-0A-E4-03-89-0F
00-0A-E4-03-90-E0
→
00-0A-E4-03-B7-EF
00-0A-E4-04-1A-56
→
00-0A-E4-04-41-65
00-0A-E4-04-80-E8
→
00-0A-E4-04-A7-F7
00-0A-E4-04-D2-FC
→
00-0A-E4-05-48-2B
00-0A-E4-05-B7-DF
→
00-0A-E4-06-05-FE
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
ADAC operation 57
Table 4
Default IP Phone MAC address ranges for ADAC (cont’d.)
00-0A-E4-06-55-EC
→
00-0A-E4-07-19-3B
00-0A-E4-08-0A-02
→
00-0A-E4-08-7F-31
00-0A-E4-08-B2-89
→
00-0A-E4-09-75-D8
00-0A-E4-09-BB-9D
→
00-0A-E4-09-CF-24
00-0A-E4-09-FC-2B
→
00-0A-E4-0A-71-5A
00-0A-E4-0A-9D-DA
→
00-0A-E4-0B-61-29
00-0A-E4-0B-BB-FC
→
00-0A-E4-0B-BC-0F
00-0A-E4-0B-D9-BE
→
00-0A-E4-0C-9D-0D
00-13-65-FE-F3-2C
→
00-13-65-FF-ED-2B
00-15-9B-FE-A4-66
→
00-15-9B-FF-24-B5
00-16-CA-00-00-00
→
00-16-CA-01-FF-FF
00-16-CA-F2-74-20
→
00-16-CA-F4-BE-0F
00-17-65-F6-94-C0
→
00-17-65-F7-38-CF
00-17-65-FD-00-00
→
00-17-65-FF-FF-FF
00-18-B0-33-90-00
→
00-18-B0-35-DF-FF
00-19-69-83-25-40
→
00-19-69-85-5F-FF
ADAC checks a MAC address against the supported ranges only when
first learning the address. If you change the supported MAC address
ranges, this has no effect on the previously learned MACs.
When a MAC address ages out, ADAC considers it as belonging to the
same category of devices (IP Phones or non-IP Phones) as when it was
first learned, regardless of whether you have changed the supported
ranges since it was learned.
The maximum number of ranges that ADAC supports is 128.
Autoconfiguration of Nortel IP Phones
The ADAC port participation can be set independently by enabling or
disabling ADAC for particular ports.
When a new MAC address of an IP phone is learned on a port with ADAC
enabled, ADAC performs the Autoconfiguration for that port (this operation
is dependent on the configured ADAC operating mode and on whether
other MAC addresses are learned on that port). This includes the required
configuration of ports and VLANs, and involves minimal intervention by
the user.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
58 ADAC Fundamentals
If all MAC addresses belonging to Nortel IP Phones on a port age out, the
Autoconfiguration settings are removed from the port.
Initial user settings
Before enabling the ADAC feature, you must set the operating mode,
according to how the IP Phones are configured to send frames: tagged
or untagged.
When running ADAC in Untagged-Frames-Advanced or Tagged-Frames
operating modes, you must also specify the following:
•
•
the ID of the VLAN to be used for voice packets
at least one of the following:
— Call Server port, if it is connected directly to the switch
— Uplink port, if used
ATTENTION
To properly enable the ADAC feature, the VLAN ID for the Voice-VLAN must
not be a pre-existing VLAN.
You must also ensure that voice traffic entering the Uplink port is tagged
with the Voice VLAN ID. This configuration must be made on all switches
on the path to the Call Server.
Port Restrictions
The following restrictions apply to the Call Server, Uplink, and Telephony
ports.
The Call Server port must not be:
•
•
•
•
part of a trunk (MLT, LAG)
a Monitor Port in port mirroring
a Telephony port
the Uplink port
The Uplink port must not be:
•
•
•
•
a Monitor Port in port mirroring
a Telephony port
an EAP port
the Call Server port
The Telephony port must not be:
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
ADAC operation 59
•
•
•
•
•
part of a trunk (MLT, LAG)
a Monitor Port in port mirroring
an IGMP static router port
the Call Server port
the Uplink port
Operating modes
ADAC can be configured to apply settings depending on how the Nortel IP
Phones are configured to send traffic (tagged or untagged) and depending
on the desired complexity level of the Autoconfiguration. The following
sections provide detailed descriptions of the configurations that are applied
in each ADAC operating mode.
•
•
•
•
“QoS Settings” (page 59)
“Untagged-Frames-Basic operating mode” (page 59)
“Untagged-Frames-Advanced operating mode” (page 60)
“Tagged-Frames operating mode” (page 62)
QoS Settings
ADAC QoS configuration is applied to:
•
•
•
traffic coming from the IP Phones
traffic coming from the Call Server port
traffic coming from the Uplink port
Untagged-Frames-Basic operating mode
In the Untagged-Frames-Basic operating mode, the Call Server and Uplink
ports are not used, and therefore QoS settings are applied only for traffic
coming from the IP Phones. The VLAN configuration is minimal.
To properly configure the Untagged-Frames-Basic mode, you must
perform the following:
•
•
Configure the IP Phones to send untagged frames.
•
Ensure that the Filter Unregistered Frames option is set to disabled
on the ADAC-enabled ports (or that the ports belong to at least one
VLAN).
Connect only IP Phones to a port. (You cannot connect a device that is
not a Nortel IP Phone to the same port.)
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
60 ADAC Fundamentals
Untagged-Frames-Basic QoS configuration
In this operating mode, QoS settings are applied only for traffic coming
from the IP Phones. The Call Server and Uplink ports are not used.
Autoconfiguration performs the following:
•
creates an Unrestricted Interface with all Telephony ports (each time a
new Telephony port is detected, it will be added to this interface)
•
•
creates an IP Filter (all fields set to Ignore) and an IP Filter Group
•
creates a policy containing the above
uses Premium Service (transmit frame, update DSCP to 0x2E, Drop
Precedence to Loss Sensitive, Update Priority to 6)
Untagged-Frames-Basic VLAN configuration
In the Untagged-Frames-Basic operating mode, Autoconfiguration also
performs the following VLAN configuration:
•
Tagging of Telephony ports is set to Untagged.
Untagged-Frames-Advanced operating mode
To properly configure the Untagged-Frames-Advanced operating mode,
you must perform the following:
•
•
Configure the IP Phones to send untagged frames.
•
Ensure that Filter Unregistered Frames option is set to disabled on the
ADAC-enabled ports (or that the ports belong to at least one VLAN).
•
Specify the Voice-VLAN ID and either the Call Server port or the Uplink
port, as applicable.
•
If the switch is not directly connected to the Call Server, ensure that
the telephony packets coming from the Call Server through the Uplink
port are tagged with the Voice-VLAN ID.
Connect only IP Phones to a port. (You cannot connect a device that is
not a Nortel IP Phone to the same port.)
Untagged-Frames-Advanced QoS configuration
In the Untagged-Frames-Advanced mode, Autoconfiguration performs the
following QoS configuration for each port:
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
ADAC operation 61
Table 5
Untagged-Frames-Advanced QoS configuration
For traffic
coming from:
Autoconfiguration does the following:
Telephony
ports
•
creates an Unrestricted Interface with all Telephony ports
(each time a new Telephony port is detected, it will be
added to this interface)
•
creates an IP Filter (all fields set to Ignore) and an IP Filter
Group
•
uses Premium Service (transmit frame, update DSCP to
0x2E, Drop Precedence to Loss Sensitive, Update Priority
to 6)
•
•
creates a policy containing all of the above
•
•
creates an Unrestricted Interface containing the Uplink port
•
•
uses Premium Service
Call Server
ports
Uplink ports
adds the Call Server port to the interface group created for
Telephony ports
creates a Layer 2 Filter, with EtherType IP, VLAN set to
ID of the Voice-VLAN and Tagged (all other fields set to
Ignore)
creates a policy containing all of the above
Untagged-Frames-Advanced VLAN configuration
In the Untagged-Frames-Advanced mode, Autoconfiguration also performs
the following VLAN configurations:
Table 6
Untagged-Frames-Advanced VLAN configuration
Port type
Membership
Tagging
Telephony
port
added to Voice-VLAN;
Untagged
removed from other
VLANs (The port
does not need to be a
member of other VLANs)
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
PVID
Voice-VLAN
62 ADAC Fundamentals
Table 6
Untagged-Frames-Advanced VLAN configuration (cont’d.)
Port type
Membership
Tagging
PVID
Call Server
port
(if any)
added to Voice-VLAN;
not removed from other
VLANs
Untagged
Voice-VLAN
Uplink port
(if any)
added to Voice-VLAN;
not removed from other
VLANs
Tagged
no change (All
VLAN changes
made by ADAC are
as if VCC=flexible,
so the Auto-PVID
setting is ignored.)
Tagged-Frames operating mode
To properly configure the Tagged-Frames operating mode, you must
perform the following:
•
Configure the IP Phones to send tagged frames with the ID of the
Voice-VLAN.
•
Connect at least one Nortel IP Phone to a telephony port. (In this
mode, other devices can be connected to the same port; for example,
when a PC is connected directly to the IP phone.)
•
Ensure that the Filter Unregistered Frames option is set to disabled on
the ADAC-enabled ports. (Otherwise, no source MAC address can be
learned for incoming packets tagged with the Voice VLAN ID, meaning
that no phone can be detected.)
•
Specify the Voice-VLAN ID and either the Call Server port or the Uplink
port, as applicable.
•
If the switch is not directly connected to the Call Server, ensure that
the telephony packets coming from the Call Server through the Uplink
port are tagged with the Voice-VLAN ID.
Tagged-Frames QoS configuration
In the Tagged-Frames operating mode, Autoconfiguration performs the
following QoS configuration:
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
ADAC operation 63
Table 7
Tagged-Frames QoS configuration
For traffic
coming from:
Autoconfiguration does the following:
Telephony ports
•
creates an Unrestricted Interface (Call Server interface ID
will be a member of this interface group)
•
creates an IP Filter (all fields set to Ignore) and an IP
Filter Group
•
•
•
uses Premium Service
•
creates a Layer 2 Filter, with EtherType IP, VLAN set to
ID of the Voice-VLAN and Tagged (all other fields set to
Ignore)
•
•
uses Premium Service
IP Phones and
Uplink port
creates a policy containing all of the above
creates an Unrestricted Interface containing all Telephony
ports and Uplink port
creates a policy containing all of the above
In this way, all traffic tagged with the Voice-VLAN ID is prioritized.
Tagged-Frames VLAN configuration
In the Tagged-Frames operating mode, Autoconfiguration also performs
the following VLAN configurations:
Table 8
Tagged-Frames VLAN configuration
Port type
Membership
Tagging
PVID
Telephony
port
added to Voice-VLAN;
not removed from other
VLANs
Userconfigurable
(default is Unt
agPVIDOnly)
User-configurable
1 (default value is
Default VLAN [1])
Call Server
port
(if any)
added to Voice-VLAN;
not removed from other
VLANs
Untagged
Voice-VLAN
Uplink port
(if any)
added to Voice-VLAN;
not removed from other
VLANs
Tagged
no change (All VLAN
changes made by
ADAC are as if
VCC=flexible, so the
Auto-PVID setting is
ignored.)
1 If the PVID is set to a VLAN which does not exist when ADAC is applied, the
PVID is set to Default VLAN (1).
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
64 ADAC Fundamentals
Dynamic VLAN Autoconfiguration
ATTENTION
Dynamic configurations are switch configurations that are not saved to NVRAM.
Therefore, dynamic configurations are not restored following a switch reboot.
The following describes the details of the ADAC VLAN configuration:
•
•
•
The ADAC Voice VLAN is created and removed automatically.
•
For telephony ports, the NVRAM VLAN configuration is restored in two
cases: after the ADAC configuration is removed due to the removal of
the IP Phone, or after ADAC is disabled for that port.
•
Any VLAN configuration that is made to the Uplink port is always saved
to NVRAM (even when ADAC is enabled).
•
The VLAN Configuration Control (VCC) rules, other than those for
the Flexible mode, are skipped internally by ADAC when configuring
VLANs. Any VLAN settings made automatically by ADAC follow the
rules of the Flexible mode, regardless of the current value of VCC. Any
settings that you manually make on ADAC ports follow the current VCC
mode, similar to a non-ADAC port.
All membership to the ADAC Voice VLAN is dynamic.
From the moment ADAC is enabled on a telephony port or Call Server
port, all VLAN configuration is dynamic (including user configuration).
After the ADAC configuration is removed from these ports, the
pre-ADAC configuration from NVRAM is restored.
ADAC and stacking
In a stack, the global ADAC settings on the base unit are applied across
the stack, except for port settings (for Call Server port, Uplink port and
Telephony ports).
The ADAC port states are taken from each unit. Therefore, a unit’s ports
have the same ADAC status in a stack as they do in stand-alone mode.
If two or more units each have a configured Call Server port in stand-alone
mode and are then joined together in a stack, the Call Server port with the
lowest interface number in the stack is elected the stack Call Server port.
This same scenario also occurs for the Uplink port.
Lost Call Server Port or Uplink Port
If ADAC is operating in either the Untagged-Frames-Advanced or
Tagged-Frames operating mode, and you reset the unit on which the Call
Server or Uplink port is located, the feature loses the valid Call Server or
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
ADAC operation 65
Uplink port. In this case, the feature is temporarily disabled until the unit
with the Call Server or Uplink port re-joins the stack and the configuration
becomes valid again.
If any change is made on the base unit to the ADAC global configuration
while the feature is temporary disabled, the feature stays disabled
regardless of whether the Call Server or Uplink port are located when their
unit re-joins the stack. Changing Autodetection on Telephony ports has no
effect on the global settings.
ADAC Uplink port as part of trunk
When a port that is a member of an already active MLT, DMLT, or LAG is
selected as the ADAC Uplink port, then the entire trunk is set as the Uplink
connection. This means that the ADAC configuration (VLAN and QoS) is
applied for all the members of the trunk. ADAC does not interfere in the
way traffic is forwarded in the trunk.
Uplink port as part of MLT in a stack
The Uplink port can be part of an MLT. If the unit containing the Uplink port
in a stack is removed from the stack, the lowest port from the same MLT
becomes the new Uplink port.
After rebooting a stack, each unit that has a port member belonging to the
Uplink MLT is configured as an Uplink port on the unit. After joining stack,
the lowest Uplink port is elected as the stack’s Uplink port.
ADAC and LACP enabled on an Uplink port
To set the Uplink port as LACP-enabled, you must first configure and
enable Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) on the port, and then you
can set the port as the Uplink port.
Due to the dynamic configuration of VLANs, you are not allowed to:
•
•
enable LACP on a preconfigured Uplink port
•
•
change the admin key of any member of the ADAC Uplink ports
enable LACP on a port with the same admin key as the ADAC Uplink
ports
set the admin key for a LACP-enabled port to the same value as the
Uplink port
When ADAC sets the configuration for the Uplink port, the VLAN and QoS
configuration is applied for all LACP-enabled (active or passive) ports
belonging to the same Link Aggregation Group (LAG) as the Uplink port.
Any changes to the LAG mode, from active to passive or from passive to
active, have no effect on ADAC.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
66 ADAC Fundamentals
Disabling LACP on the Uplink port
When you disable the LAG, the Uplink configuration is removed for all
trunk members, except for the original Uplink port.
After you remove the LAG, you cannot reenable the configuration for the
Uplink port. You must remove the Uplink, reconfigure the LAG, and then
set the Uplink port again.
Uplink port as part of LACP in a stack
In a stack, LAGs containing the Uplink port operate similarly to MLTs
containing the Uplink port.
If the unit containing the Uplink port in a stack is removed from the stack,
the lowest port from the same LAG becomes the new Uplink port.
After rebooting a stack, each unit that has a port member belonging to the
Uplink LAG is configured as an Uplink port on the unit. After joining the
stack, the lowest Uplink port is elected as the stack Uplink port.
ADAC and EAP configuration
ADAC and Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) are mutually exclusive
on the Call Server port and the Uplink port.
However, on telephony ports, you can enable both ADAC and EAP,
provided the following conditions are met:
•
•
The ports must be configured to allow non-EAP MAC addresses.
Guest VLAN must not be allowed on the ports.
To enable ADAC on an EAP port, you must perform the following:
Step
Action
1
On the switch, globally enable support for non-EAP
MAC addresses. (In NNCLI, use the eap multihost
allow-non-eap-enable command.)
2
On each telephony port, enable support for non-EAP MAC
addresses. (In NNCLI, use the eap multihost port <port>
allow-non-eap-enable command.)
3
On each telephony port, enable EAP Multihost. (In NNCLI, use
the eap multihost port <port> enable command.)
4
On the telephony ports, ensure that Guest VLAN is disabled. (In
NNCLI, use the show eap guest-vlan command.)
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
ADAC operation 67
5
On the switch, enable EAP globally. (In NNCLI, use the eap
enable command.)
6
Configure and enable ADAC on the ports.
--End--
When you configure ADAC and EAP, the following restrictions apply:
1. EAP: While ADAC is enabled, cannot disable per-port EAP Multihost
or EAP setting:
— Cannot disable Multihost on port if EAP is enabled per port and
ADAC Detection is enabled per port
— Cannot enable EAP per port if Multihost is disabled per port and
ADAC Detection is enabled per port
2. ADAC: The detection can be enabled (for example, set ADAC enable
per port) only if:
— EAP is disabled per port
or
— EAP is enabled per port and Multihost is enabled per port
EAP does not change the VLAN configuration for ADAC-enabled
ports. ADAC changes to the VLAN configuration take priority over EAP
configurations.
ADAC User Restrictions
After ADAC is enabled, you cannot:
•
•
•
•
•
erase the Voice-VLAN
remove auto-configured ports from Voice-VLAN
remove any QoS setting made by ADAC (auto-configured settings)
use the filter groups created by ADAC when setting policies
disable the policies created by ADAC
You can:
•
add ports to and remove ports from the Voice-VLAN (configuration is
dynamic)
•
change the tagging and PVID of all ports in the Voice-VLAN
(configuration is dynamic)
•
•
add interfaces to and remove interfaces from ADAC interface groups
use the filters created by ADAC when setting filter groups. (This means
that when disabling the feature or when changing operating mode, if
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
68 ADAC Fundamentals
the filter is used by filter groups other than the ADAC filter group, the
filter is not deleted.)
•
use the interface groups created by ADAC when setting policies. (This
means that when disabling the feature or when changing operating
mode, if the interface group is used by a policy other than the ADAC
policy, the interface group is not deleted.)
Adding the Voice-VLAN to another STG
In Untagged-Frames-Advanced or Tagged-Frames modes, ADAC
sets tagging for the Call Server port to UntaggedAll. However, STP
configuration rules do not allow an untagged port to span multiple STGs.
As a result, you cannot add the Voice-VLAN to an STG as long as the Call
Server is a member of another VLAN that belongs to another STG.
In order to successfully add the Voice-VLAN to a different STG using the
same Call Server port, you must first remove the Call Server port from all
other VLANs.
Disabling ADAC
Disabling the ADAC feature means the deletion of all configurations
(except as noted in “ADAC User Restrictions” (page 67)), including the
following:
•
All ADAC-involved ports are removed from the Voice-VLAN and the
Voice-VLAN is deleted.
•
PVID is set to the Management VLAN ID. The Uplink port is not
changed if it has a value other than the Voice-VLAN ID (that is, if you
have explicitly changed it after Autoconfiguration).
ADAC feature restrictions
•
The ADAC and Common Open Policy Services (COPS) features are
mutually exclusive.
ADAC management
For more details on network configurations required to support Nortel IP
Phones, see Data Networking for Voice over IP () (553-3001-160).
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
69
.
LACP and VLACP Fundamentals
IEEE 802.3ad Link Aggregation
With IEEE 802.3ad-based link aggregation, you can aggregate one or
more links to form Link Aggregation Groups (LAG) so that a MAC client
can treat the Link Aggregation Group as if it were a single link. Link
aggregation increases the aggregate throughput of the interconnection
between the devices while providing link redundancy.
Although IEEE 802.3ad-based link aggregation and Multi-Link Trunking
(MLT) features provide similar services, MLT is statically defined, whereas
IEEE 802.3ad-based link aggregation is dynamic and provides additional
functionality.
With Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP), as defined by the IEEE
802.3ad standard, a switch can learn the presence and capabilities of a
remote switch by exchanging information with the remote switch before a
trunk group is formed. Either switch can accept or reject the aggregation
request with the far end for each port. A link that cannot join a trunk group
operates as an individual link.
The main purpose of LACP is to manage switch ports and their port
memberships to link aggregation trunk groups (LAGs). LACP can
dynamically add or remove LAG ports, depending on their availability and
states. By default, Link Aggregation is disabled on all ports.
Link aggregation employs the following principles and concepts:
•
A MAC client communicates with a set of ports through an Aggregator,
which presents a standard IEEE 802.3 service interface to the MAC
client. The Aggregator binds to one or more ports within a system.
•
The Aggregator distributes frame transmissions from the MAC client to
the various ports. The Aggregator also collects received frames from
the ports and transparently passes them to the MAC client.
•
A system can contain multiple Aggregators that serve multiple MAC
clients. A given port binds to (at most) a single Aggregator at any time.
At any one time, only one Aggregator serves a MAC client.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
70 LACP and VLACP Fundamentals
•
The binding of ports to Aggregators within a system is managed by the
Link Aggregation Control feature. The Link Aggregation Control feature
determines which links can be aggregated, aggregates them, binds
the ports within the system to an appropriate Aggregator, and monitors
conditions to determine when a change in aggregation is needed.
The network manager can control the determination and binding
directly by manipulating the state variables of Link Aggregation (for
example, Keys). In addition, automatic determination, configuration,
binding, and monitoring can occur by using a Link Aggregation Control
Protocol (LACP).
The LACP uses peer exchanges across the links to determine, on an
ongoing basis, the aggregation capability of the various links, and to
continuously provide the maximum level of aggregation between a pair
of systems.
•
Each port has a unique, globally administered MAC address.
The MAC address is the source address for frame exchanges that
entities within the Link Aggregation sublayer itself (for example, LACP
and Marker protocol exchanges) initiate.
•
Each Aggregator has a unique, globally administered MAC address,
which is used as the MAC address of the aggregation from the
perspective of the MAC Client, both as a source address for
transmitted frames and as the destination address for received frames.
The MAC address of the Aggregator can be one of the MAC addresses
of a port in the associated Link Aggregation Group.
Link aggregation rules
The 4500 Series switch link aggregation groups operate under the
following rules:
•
•
Link aggregation groups are formed using LACP.
•
•
All ports in a link aggregation group must operate in full-duplex mode.
•
•
All ports in a link aggregation group must be in the same VLANs.
•
LACPDUs are transmitted and received on all ports in the link
aggregation group.
•
Link aggregation is compatible with the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP).
All ports in a link aggregation group must connect to the same far-end
system.
You must configure all ports in a link aggregation group to the same
port speed.
In stack mode, ports in a link aggregation group can be on different
units to form a distributed LAG (DLAG).
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
VLACP
•
•
Link aggregation groups must be in the same STP groups.
•
•
•
Support exists for a maximum of 8 link aggregation groups.
•
The MLT/LAG is a logical port. The STP protocol is computing the
topology using this logical port, not on individual MLT/LAG member
ports. The logical port is represented by the first MLT/LAG port. The
STP events related to MLT/LAG are logged using the first MLT/LAG
port.
71
STP BPDUs are transmitted and received only on the first link in the
group.
Support exists for a maximum of four active links for each LAG.
Support exists for an unlimited standby links for each LAG (for
example, if a switch or stack has one LAG, you can configure all non
active LAG link ports as standby ports for that LAG).
The maximum number of LAGs is eight, and the maximum number
of active links for each group is four. With Link Aggregation, you can
configure more than four links in one LAG. The first four high-priority links
are active links, and together, they form a trunk group. The fifth low-priority
link remains in standby mode. When an active links goes down, the
standby link becomes active and is added to the trunk group. For more
information, see “Configuring LACP and VLACP using the NNCLI” (page
129) and “Configuring LACP and VLACP using Device Manager” (page
193).
The failover process is as follows:
•
•
The down link is removed from the trunk group.
The highest priority standby link is added to the trunk group.
A temporary delay in traffic flow can occur due to links switching. If the
active link goes down and no standby link exists, the traffic is rerouted to
the remaining active links with a minimal delay in time.
VLACP
Many enterprise networks require that trunk links provide subsecond
failover to the redundant link when a failure occurs at the local or remote
endpoint. This requirement can be met when both ends of the link are
informed of any loss of communication.
Virtual Link Aggregation Control Protocol (VLACP), an LACP extension, is
a Layer 2 handshaking protocol that provides end-to-end failure detection
between two physical Ethernet interfaces. It allows the switch to detect
unidirectional or bidirectional link failures.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
72 LACP and VLACP Fundamentals
Virtual LACP (VLACP) overview
While Ethernet has been extended to detect remote link failures through
functions such as Remote Fault Indication and Far End Fault Indication
mechanisms, a limitation of these functions is that they terminate at
the next Ethernet hop. Therefore, failures cannot be determined on an
end-to-end basis.
Figure 21 "Problem description (1 of 2)" (page 72) provides an illustration
of these limitations. While the Enterprise networks shown can connect
their aggregated Ethernet trunk groups through a service provider network
connection (for example, through a VPN), far-end failures cannot be
signaled with Ethernet-based functions that operate end-to-end through
the service provider cloud.
In Figure 21 "Problem description (1 of 2)" (page 72), the MLT (between
Enterprise switches S1 and S2) extends through the service provider (SP)
network.
Figure 21
Problem description (1 of 2)
As shown in Figure 22 "Problem description (2 of 2)" (page 73), if the L2
link on S1 (S1/L2) fails, the link-down failure is not propagated over the
SP network to S2. Thus, S2 continues to send traffic over the S2/L2 link,
which is black-holed because the S1/L2 link has failed.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
VLACP
73
Figure 22
Problem description (2 of 2)
Note that LACP, as defined by IEEE, is a protocol that exists between two
bridge endpoints; therefore, the LACPDUs are terminated at the next (SP)
interface.
Nortel has developed an extension to LACP, which is called
Virtual LACP (VLACP). This extension can provide an end-to-end failure
detection mechanism. With VLACP, far-end failures can be detected
allowing an MLT to fail over properly when end-to-end connectivity is not
guaranteed for certain links in an aggregation group. VLACP prevents the
failure scenario shown in Figure 22 "Problem description (2 of 2)" (page
73).
VLACP features
This section provides a summary of some of the key features of VLACP as
implemented in Release 5.0 software:
•
VLACP is configured per port. A port can be an individual port or a
member of an MLT.
•
When you set VLACP parameters for a trunk port, the settings are
applied to all trunk members.
•
For VLACP to operate properly, there must be a logical point-to-point
connection (Layer 2 tunnel) between the two endpoints.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
74 LACP and VLACP Fundamentals
•
•
VLACP does not work for point-to-multipoint connections.
•
For the current software release, VLACP is supported on Ethernet
interfaces only.
•
VLACP can run independently as a port-to-port protocol or on top of
MLT or LACP protocol.
•
VLACP packets are untagged because they operate at the port level
and not the VLAN level.
•
The Destination Mac Address used in VLACPDUs is configurable. The
MAC Address must be a multicast MAC Address so that it is always
flooded. This allows the exchange of VLACPDUs from end to end.
On each port that has VLACP enabled, VLACPDUs are sent
periodically. If VLACPDUs are not received on a particular link, that
link is taken down after a configurable timeout period.
NORTEL recommends you to set VLACP enabled ports with the following
values in order to provide a higher resiliency.
•
•
•
the timeout scale to five
the timeout type to short
the fast periodic time to 500ms
When you set the timeout scale to lower values in heavily loaded
networks, it causes undesired behavior for VLACP enabled ports.
Troubleshooting
Error logs are created for the following failures and errors:
•
•
An incorrect PDU, such as wrong destination MAC addresses received
•
•
A port index that is out of range
An inability to enable VLACP on a port due to unallowable Destination
MAC addresses
A port was blocked by VLACP (a log message is also generated when
the port is unblocked)
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
75
.
Configuring VLANs using the NNCLI
The NNCLI commands described in this section to create and manage of
VLANs. Depending on the VLAN type, the command mode needed to
execute these commands can differ.
Displaying VLAN information
Use the following procedure to display the number, name, type, protocol,
user PID, state of a VLAN and whether it is a management VLAN.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To display VLAN information, use the following command in
Privileged EXEC mode:
show vlan [type {port | protocol-ipEther2| protocol
-ipx802.3 | protocol-ipx802.2 | protocol-ipxSnap |
protocol-ipxEther2 | protocol-decEther2 | protocolsnaEther2 | protocol-Netbios | protocol-xnsEther2 |
protocol-vinesEther2 | protocol-ipv6Ether2 | protocol-U
serdef |protocol-RarpEther2] [protocol-sna802.2]}[vid
<1-4094>]
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
vid <1-4094>
Enter the number of the VLAN to display.
type
Enter the type of VLAN to display:
•
•
Protocol parameter
port - port-based
protocol - protocol-based (see following list)
Description
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
76 Configuring VLANs using the NNCLI
Variable
Value
protocol-ipEther2
Specify an ipEther2 protocol-based VLAN.
protocol-ipx802.3
Specify an ipx802.3 protocol-based VLAN.
protocol-ipx802.2
Specify an ipx802.2 protocol-based VLAN.
protocol-ipxSnap
Specify an ipxSnap protocol-based VLAN.
protocol-ipxEther2
Specify an ipxEther2 protocol-based VLAN.
protocol-decEther2
Specify a decEther2 protocol-based VLAN.
protocol-snaEther2
Specify an snaEther2 protocol-based VLAN.
protocol-Netbios
Specify a NetBIOS protocol-based VLAN.
protocol-xnsEther2
Specify an xnsEther2 protocol-based VLAN.
protocol-vinesEther2
Specify a vinesEther2 protocol-based VLAN.
protocol-ipv6Ether2
Specify an ipv6Ether2 protocol-based VLAN.
protocol-Userdef
Specify a user-defined protocol-based VLAN.
protocol-RarpEther2
Specify a RarpEther2 protocol-based VLAN.
protocol-sna802.2
Specify a sna802.2 VLAN.
Displaying VLAN interface information
Use the following procedure to display VLAN settings associated with a
port, including tagging information, PVID number, priority, and filtering
information for tagged, untagged, and unregistered frames.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To display VLAN settings, use the following command in
Privileged EXEC mode:
show vlan interface info [<portlist>]
--End--
Displaying port membership in VLANs
Use the following procedure to display port membership in VLANs.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To display port membership in VLANs, use the following
command in Privileged EXEC mode:
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Deleting the management VLAN IP address
77
show vlan interface vids [<portlist>]
--End--
Displaying the management VLAN
Use the following procedure to display the management VLAN.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To display the management VLAN, use the following command
in Privileged EXEC mode:
show vlan mgmt
--End--
Configuring the management VLAN
Use the following procedure to configure the management VLAN.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To configure the management VLAN, use the following
command from Global Configuration mode:
vlan mgmt <1-4094>
--End--
Deleting the management VLAN IP address
Use the following procedure to delete the management VLAN IP address.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To delete the management VLAN IP address, use the following
command from Global Configuration mode:
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
78 Configuring VLANs using the NNCLI
default ip address
Note: This command will delete the management VLAN IP
address from any mode.
--End--
Resetting the management VLAN
Use the following procedure to reset the management VLAN.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To reset the management VLAN, use the following command in
Global Configuration mode:
default vlan mgmt
--End--
Creating a VLAN
Use the following procedure to create a VLAN.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To create a VLAN, use the following command from Global
Configuration mode:
vlan create <1-4094> [name <line>] type {port |
protocol-decEther2 | protocol-ipEther2 | protocolipv6Ether2 | protocol-ipx802.2 | protocol-ipx802.3
| protocol-ipxEther2 | protocol-ipxSnap | protocol
-Netbios | protocol-RarpEther2 | protocol-sna802.2
| protocol-snaEther2 | protocol-vinesEther2 |
protocol-xnsEther2 | protocol-Userdef <4096-65534> }
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
<1-4094>
Enter the number of the VLAN to create.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Removing a MAC address from allowed flooding
Variable
Value
name <line>
Enter the name of the VLAN to create.
type
Enter the type of VLAN to create:
•
•
port - port-based
protocol - protocol-based (see following list)
protocol-decEther2
Specify a decEther2 protocol-based VLAN.
protocol-ipEther2
Specify an ipEther2 protocol-based VLAN.
protocol-ipv6Ether2
Specify an ipv6Ether2 protocol-based VLAN.
protocol-ipx802.2
Specify an ipx802.2 protocol-based VLAN.
protocol-ipx802.3
Specify an ipx802.3 protocol-based VLAN.
protocol-ipxEther2
Specify an ipxEther2 protocol-based VLAN.
protocol-ipxSnap
Specify an ipxSnap protocol-based VLAN.
protocol-Netbios
Specify a NetBIOS protocol-based VLAN.
protocol-sna802.2
Specify an sna802.2 protocol-based VLAN.
protocol-snaEther2
Specify an snaEther2 protocol-based VLAN.
protocol-xnsEther2
Specify an xnsEther2 protocol-based VLAN.
protocol-vinesEther2
Specify a vinesEther2 protocol-based VLAN.
protocol-Userdef
<4096-65534>
Specify a user-defined protocol-based VLAN.
Deleting a VLAN
Use the following procedure to delete a VLAN.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To delete a VLAN, use the following command from Global
Configuration mode:
vlan delete <1-4094>
Note: VLAN 1 cannot be deleted.
--End--
Removing a MAC address from allowed flooding
Use the following procedure to remove a MAC address from the list of
addresses for which flooding is allowed.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
79
80 Configuring VLANs using the NNCLI
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To remove a MAC address, use the following command from
Global Configuration mode:
no vlan [igmp unknown-mcast-allow-flood <mac_address>]
--End--
Configuring VLAN name
Use the following procedure to configure or change a VLAN name.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To change the VLAN name, use the following command from
Global Configuration mode:
vlan name <1-4094> <name>
--End--
Configuring automatic PVID
Use the following procedure to enable automatic PVID.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To enable automatic PVID, use the following command from
Global Configuration mode:
auto-pvid
Use the no form of this command to disable.
--End--
Configuring port VLAN settings
Use the following procedure to configure port VLAN settings.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Configuring VLAN member ports
81
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To configure VLAN port settings, use the following command
from Global Configuration mode:
vlan ports [<portlist>] [tagging {enable | disable |
tagAll | untagAll | tagPvidOnly | untagPvidOnly}] [pvid
<1-4094>] [filter-untagged-frame {enable | disable}]
[filter-unregistered-frames {enable | disable}]
[priority <0-7>] [name <line>]
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
<portlist>
Enter the port numbers to be configured for a
VLAN.
tagging {enable | disable |
tagAll | untagAll | tagPvidOnly
|untagPvidOnly}
Enables or disables the port as a tagged VLAN
member for egressing packet.
pvid <1-4094>
Sets the PVID of the port to the specified
VLAN.
filter-untagged-frame
{enable|disable}
Enables or disables the port to filter received
untagged packets.
filter-unregistered-frames
{enable | disable}
Enables or disables the port to filter received
unregistered packets. Enabling this feature
on a port means that any frames with a VID
to which the port does not belong to are
discarded.
priority <0-7>
Sets the port as a priority for the switch to
consider as it forwards received packets.
name <line>
Enter the name you want for this port.
ATTENTION
This option can only be used if a single port
is specified in the <portlist>.
Configuring VLAN member ports
Use the following procedure to add or remove VLAN member ports.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
82 Configuring VLANs using the NNCLI
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To configure VLAN member ports, use the following command
from Global Configuration mode:
vlan members [add | remove] <1-4094> <portlist>
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
add | remove
Adds a port to or removes a port from a VLAN.
ATTENTION
If this parameter is omitted, set the exact
port membership for the VLAN; the prior port
membership of the VLAN is discarded and
replaced by the new list of ports.
<1-4094>
Specify the target VLAN.
portlist
Enter the list of ports to be added, removed, or
assigned to the VLAN.
Configuring VLAN Configuration Control
VLAN Configuration Control (VCC) allows a switch administrator to control
how VLANs are modified. VLAN Configuration Control is a superset of
the existing AutoPVID functionality and incorporates this functionality for
backwards compatibility. VLAN Configuration Control is globally applied
to all VLANs on the switch.
VLAN Configuration Control offers four options for controlling VLAN
modification:
•
•
•
•
Strict
Automatic
AutoPVID
Flexible
ATTENTION
Strict is the factory default setting.
VLAN Configuration Control is only applied to ports with the tagging modes
of Untag All and Tag PVID Only.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Configuring VLAN Configuration Control
83
To configure VCC using the NNCLI, see the following commands:
Displaying VLAN Configuration Control settings
Use the following procedure to display VLAN Configuration Control
settings.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To display VLAN Configuration Control settings, use the
following command from Global Configuration mode:
show vlan configcontrol
--End--
Modifying VLAN Configuration Control
Use the following procedure to modify the current VLAN Configuration
Control setting. This command applies the selected option to all VLANs
on the switch.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To modify the current VLAN Configuration Control setting, use
the following command from Global Configuration mode:
vlan configcontrol <vcc_option>
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
<vcc_option>
This parameter denotes the VCC option to use
on the switch. The valid values are:
•
automatic: Changes the VCC option to
Automatic.
•
autopvid: Changes the VCC option to
AutoPVID.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
84 Configuring VLANs using the NNCLI
Variable
Value
•
flexible: Changes the VCC option to
Flexible.
•
strict: Changes the VCC option to Strict.
This is the default VCC value.
Managing MAC address forwarding database table
Note: In certain situations, due to the hash algorithm used by switch
to store MAC addresses into memory, some MAC addresses may not
be learned.
This section shows you how to view the contents of the MAC address
forwarding database table, setting the age-out time for the addresses, and
clearing The MAC address table. The following topics are covered:
•
•
•
•
•
•
“Displaying the MAC address forwarding table” (page 84)
•
•
“Clearing the MAC address table on a trunk” (page 87)
“Configuring aging time for unseen MAC addresses” (page 85)
“Setting aging time for unseen MAC addresses to default” (page 86)
“Clearing the MAC address table on a VLAN” (page 86)
“Clearing the MAC address table” (page 86)
“Clearing the MAC address table on a FastEthernet interface” (page
87)
“Removing a single address from the MAC address table” (page 88)
Displaying the MAC address forwarding table
Use the following procedure to display the current contents of the MAC
address forwarding database table. You can now filter the MAC Address
table by port number. The MAC address table can store up to 16000
addresses.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To display the MAC address forwarding table, use the following
command from Privileged EXEC mode:
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Managing MAC address forwarding database table 85
show mac-address-table [vid <1-4094>] [aging-time]
[address <H.H.H>] [port <portlist>]
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
vid <1-4094>
Enter the number of the VLAN for which you
want to display the forwarding database.
Default is to display the management VLAN’s
database.
aging-time
Display the time in seconds after which an
unused entry is removed from the forwarding
database.
address <H.H.H>
Display a specific MAC address if it exists in
the database. Enter the MAC address you
want displayed.
port <portlist>
Specify ports.
Configuring aging time for unseen MAC addresses
Use the following procedure to configure the time during which the switch
retains unseen MAC addresses.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To configure aging time, use the following command from Global
Configuration mode:
mac-address-table aging-time <10-1 000 000>
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
vid <10-1 000 000>
Enter the aging time in seconds that you want
for MAC addresses before they expire.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
86 Configuring VLANs using the NNCLI
Setting aging time for unseen MAC addresses to default
Use the following procedure to set the aging time for MAC addresses to
300 seconds.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To set again time to default (300 seconds), use the following
command from Global Configuration mode:
default mac-address-table aging-time
--End--
Clearing the MAC address table
Use the following procedure to clear the MAC address table.
Prerequisites
•
Log on to the Privileged EXEC mode.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To flush the MAC address table, use the following command:
clear mac-address-table
--End--
Clearing the MAC address table on a VLAN
Perform this procedure to flush the MAC addresses for a specific VLAN.
Prerequisites
•
Log on to the Privileged EXEC mode.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To flush the MAC address table for a specific VLAN, use the
following command:
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Managing MAC address forwarding database table 87
clear mac-address-table interface vlan <1-4094>
--End--
Variable definition
Use the information in the following table to complete this procedure.
Variable
Value
1-4094
Specify the VLAN for which you want to be flush
the MAC addresses.
Clearing the MAC address table on a FastEthernet interface
Perform this procedure to flush the MAC addresses for the specified ports.
This command does not flush the addresses learned on the trunk.
Prerequisites
•
Log on to the Privileged EXEC mode.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To clear the MAC address table on a FastEthernet interface, use
the following command.
clear mac-address-table interface FastEthernet
<LINE>
--End--
Variable definition
Use the information in the table to complete this procedure.
Variable
Value
LINE
Specifies the list of ports for which you
want to flush the MAC addresses.
Clearing the MAC address table on a trunk
Perform this procedure to flush the MAC addresses for the specified trunk.
This command flushes only addresses that are learned on the trunk.
Prerequisites
•
Log on to the Privileged EXEC mode.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
88 Configuring VLANs using the NNCLI
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To clear the MAC address table on a trunk, use the following
command:
clear mac-address-table interface mlt <1-32>
--End--
Variable definition
Use the information in the table to complete this procedure.
Variable
Value
1-32
Specifies the Trunk for which you want
to flushed the MAC addresses.
Removing a single address from the MAC address table
Perform this procedure to flush one MAC address from the MAC address
table.
Prerequisites
•
Log on to the Privileged EXEC mode.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To flush a single MAC address, use the following command:
clear mac-address-table address <H.H.H>
--End--
Variable definition
Use the information in the table to complete this procedure.
Variable
Value
H.H.H
Specify the address you want to flush
out.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
89
.
Configuring Multi-Link Trunking using
the NNCLI
Use the NNCLI commands described in this section to create and manage
Multi-Link trunks. Depending on the type of Multi-Link trunk being created
or managed, the command mode needed to execute these commands can
differ.
Displaying MLT configuration
Use the following procedure to display MLT configuration and utilization.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To display MLT configuration and utilization, use the following
command from Privileged EXEC mode:
show mlt [utilization] <1-8>
--End--
Configuring a Multi Link Trunk
Use the following procedure to configure a MLT.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To configure a MLT, use the following command from Global
Configuration mode:
mlt <id> [name <trunkname>] [enable | disable] [member
<portlist>] [learning {disable | fast | normal}] [bpdu
{all-ports | single-port}] [loadbalance <advance|basic>
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
90 Configuring Multi-Link Trunking using the NNCLI
Use the no form of this command to disable a MLT.
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
id
Enter the trunk ID; the range is 1 to 8.
name <trunkname>
Specify a text name for the trunk; enter up to
16 alphanumeric characters.
enable | disable
Enable or disable the trunk.
member <portlist>
Enter the ports that are members of the trunk.
learning <disable | fast |
normal>
Set STP learning mode.
bpdu {all-ports | single-port}
Set trunk to send and receive BPDUs on either
all ports or a single port.
Displaying STG MLT properties
Use the following procedure to display the properties of Multi-Link trunks
(MLT) participating in Spanning Tree Groups (STG).
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To display the properties of MLTs participating in Spanning Tree
Groups, use the following command in Global Configuration
mode:
show mlt spanning-tree <1-8>
--End--
Configuring STP participation for MLTs
Use the following procedure to set Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)
participation for Multi Link Trunks (MLT).
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To set STP participation for MLTs, use the following command
from Global Configuration mode:
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Disabling MLT Enable or Disable Whole Trunk feature
91
mlt spanning-tree <1-8> [stp <1-8 | all > learning
{disable | normal | fast}
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
<1 - 8>
Specify the ID of the MLT to associate with the
STG.
stp <1 - 8 | all >
Specify the spanning tree group.
learning {disable | normal |
fast}
Specify the STP learning mode:
•
•
•
disable: disables learning
normal: sets the learning mode to normal
fast: sets the learning mode to fast
Enabling all ports shutdown in the MLT
Perform this procedure to enable the shutdown of all ports in the MLT if
the MLT is disabled.
Prerequisites
•
Log on to the Global Configuration mode.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To enable the shutdown of all ports in the MLT if MLT is
disabled, use the following command:
mlt shutdown-ports-on-disable enable
--End--
Disabling MLT Enable or Disable Whole Trunk feature
Perform this procedure to disable the MLT Enable or Disable Whole Trunk
feature, and restore MLTs to the default operational mode.
Prerequisites
•
Log on to the Global Configuration mode.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
92 Configuring Multi-Link Trunking using the NNCLI
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To disable the MLT Enable or Disable Whole Trunk feature and
restore MLTs to the default operational mode use the following
command:
no mlt shutdown-ports-on-disable enable
--End--
Displaying the current MLT Enable or Disable Whole Trunk mode
of operation
Perform this procedure to display the status of the MLT Enable or Disable
Whole Trunk feature.
Prerequisites
•
Log on to the Privileged EXEC mode.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To see current MLT mode of operation use the following
command:
show shutdown-ports-on-disable
--End--
Job aid
The following command displays a sample output of the show mlt
shutdown-ports-on-disable command:
show mlt shutdown-ports-on-disable
Trunk loop prevention is enabled.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
93
.
Configuring Spanning Tree Protocol
using the NNCLI
Setting the STP mode using the NNCLI
You can set the STP operational mode with the following command:
Configuring STP operation mode
Use the following procedure to set the STP operational mode to STPG
(Nortel Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol), RSTP (802.1w Rapid Spanning
Tree Protocol), or MSTP (802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol).
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To configure STP operation mode, use the following command
from Global Configuration mode:
spanning-tree op-mode {stpg | rstp | MSTP}
--End--
Configuring STP BPDU Filtering using the NNCLI
Use the following procedure to configure STP BPDU Filtering on a port.
This command is available in all STP modes (STPG, RSTP, and MSTP).
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To configure STP BPDU filtering, use the following command in
Interface Configuration mode:
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
94 Configuring Spanning Tree Protocol using the NNCLI
spanning-tree bpdu-filtering [port <portlist>] [enable]
[timeout <10-65535 | 0> ]
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
port <portlist>
Specifies the ports affected by the
command.
enable
Enables STP BPDU Filtering on the
specified ports. The default value is
disabled.
timeout <10-65535 | 0 >
When BPDU filtering is enabled, this
indicates the time (in seconds) during
which the port remains disabled after
it receives a BPDU. The port timer is
disabled if this value is set to 0. The
default value is 120 seconds.
Creating and Managing STGs using the NNCLI
To create and manage Spanning Tree Groups, you can refer to the
Command Line Interface commands listed in this section. Depending on
the type of Spanning Tree Group that you want to create or manage, the
command mode needed to execute these commands can differ.
In the following commands, the omission of any parameters that specify a
Spanning Tree Group results in the command operating against the default
Spanning Tree Group (Spanning Tree Group 1).
To configure STGs using the NNCLI, see the following:
Configuring path cost calculation
Use the following procedure to set the path cost calculation mode for all
Spanning Tree Groups on the switch.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To set path cost calculation, use the following command from
Global Configuration mode:
spanning-tree cost-calc-mode {dot1d | dot1t}
2
To set the cost-calc-mode to its default value (dot1d), use the
following command:
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Creating and Managing STGs using the NNCLI 95
default spanning-tree cost-calc-mode
--End--
Configuring STG port membership
Use the following procedure to set the STG port membership mode for all
Spanning Tree Groups on the switch.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To set STG membership mode, use the following command from
Global Configuration mode:
spanning-tree port-mode {auto | normal}
--End--
Displaying spanning tree configuration information
Use the following procedure to display spanning tree configuration
information that is specific to either the Spanning Tree Group or to the
port.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To display spanning tree configuration information, use the
following command from Privileged EXEC mode:
show spanning-tree [stp <1-8>] {config | port| vlans}
{cost-calc-mode | op-mode | port-mode}
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
stp <1-8>
Display specified Spanning Tree Group
configuration; enter the number of the group to
be displayed.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
96 Configuring Spanning Tree Protocol using the NNCLI
Variable
Value
config | port | vlans
Display spanning tree configuration for
• config: the specified (or default) Spanning
Tree Group
•
port: the ports within the Spanning Tree
Group
•
vlans: the VLANs that are members of the
specified Spanning Tree Group
cost-calc-mode
Display the STG port membership mode.
op-mode
Display the STP operational mode (STPG,
RSTP, or MSTP).
port-mode
Display the STG port membership mode.
Creating a spanning tree group
Use the following procedure to create a spanning tree group.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To create a spanning tree group, use the following command
from Global Configuration mode:
spanning-tree stp <1-8> create
--End--
Deleting a spanning tree group
Use the following procedure to delete a spanning tree group.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To delete a spanning tree group, use the following command
from Global Configuration mode:
spanning-tree stp <1-8> delete
--End--
Enabling a spanning tree group
Use the following procedure to enable a spanning tree group.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Creating and Managing STGs using the NNCLI 97
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To enable a spanning tree group, use the following command
from Global Configuration mode:
spanning-tree stp <1-8> enable
--End--
Disabling a spanning tree group
Use the following procedure to disable a spanning tree group.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To disable a spanning tree group, use the following command
from Global Configuration mode:
spanning-tree stp <1-8> disable
--End--
Configuring STP values by STG
Use the following procedure to configure STP values by STG.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To configure STP values, use the following command from
Global Configuration mode:
spanning-tree [stp <1-8>] [forward-time <4-30>]
[hello-time <1-10>] [max-age <6-40>] [priority {0000
| 1000| 2000 | 3000 | ... | E000 | F000}] [tagged-bpdu
{enable | disable}] [tagged-bpdu-vid <1-4094>]
[multicast-address <H.H.H>] [add-vlan <1-4094>]
[remove-vlan <1-4094>]
--End--
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
98 Configuring Spanning Tree Protocol using the NNCLI
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
stp <1-8>
Specify the Spanning Tree Group; enter the
STG ID.
forward-time
<4-30>
Enter the forward time of the STG in seconds;
the range is from 4 to 30, and the default value
is 15.
hello-time
<1-10>
Enter the hello time of the STG in seconds; the
range is from 1 to 10, and the default value is
2.
max-age
<6-40>
Enter the max-age of the STG in seconds; the
range is from 6 to 40, and the default value is
20.
priority {0000 | 1000 | 2000 |
3000 | .... | E000 | F000}
Set the spanning tree priority (in Hex); if
802.1T compliant, this value must be a multiple
of 1000.
tagged-bpdu {enable | disable}
Set the BPDU as tagged or untagged. The
default value for Spanning Tree Group 1
(default group) is untagged; the default for the
other groups is tagged.
tagged-bpdu-vid <1-4094>
Set the VLAN ID (VID) for the tagged BPDU.
The default value is from 4001 to 4008 for
STG 1 to 8, respectively.
multicast-address <H.H.H>
Set the spanning tree multicast address.
add-vlan <1-4094>
Add a VLAN to the Spanning Tree Group.
remove-vlan <1-4094>
Remove a VLAN from the Spanning Tree
Group.
Restoring default spanning tree value for a STG
Use the following procedure to restore default spanning tree values for a
Spanning Tree Group.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To restore default values, use the following command from
Global Configuration mode:
default spanning-tree [stp <1-8>] [forward-time]
[hello-time] [max-age] [priority] [tagged-bpdu]
[multicast-address]
--End--
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Creating and Managing STGs using the NNCLI 99
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
stp <1-8>
Disable the Spanning Tree Group; enter the
STG ID.
forward-time
Set the forward time to the default value of 15
seconds.
hello-time
Set the hello time to the default value of 2
seconds.
max-age
Set the maximum age time to the default value
of 20 seconds.
priority
Set spanning tree priority (in Hex); if 802.1T
compliant, this value must be a multiple of
0x1000.
tagged-bpdu
Set the tagging to the default value. The
default value for Spanning Tree Group 1
(default group) is untagged; the default for the
other groups is tagged.
multicast-address
Set the spanning tree multicast MAC address
to the default.
Setting STP and STG participation
Use the following procedure to set the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) and
multiple Spanning Tree Group (STG) participation for the ports within the
specified Spanning Tree Group.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To set participation, use the following command from Interface
Configuration mode:
spanning-tree [port <portlist>] [stp <1-8>] [learning
{disable | normal | fast}] [cost <1-65535>] [priority {00
| 10 | < | F0}
--End--
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
100
Configuring Spanning Tree Protocol using the NNCLI
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
port <portlist>
Enable the spanning tree for the specified port
or ports; enter port or ports you want enabled
for the spanning tree.
ATTENTION
If you omit this parameter, the system uses
the port number you specified when you
issued the interface command to enter the
Interface Configuration mode.
stp <1-8>
Specify the spanning tree group; enter the
STG ID.
learning
{disable|normal|fast}
Specify the STP learning mode:
•
•
•
disable: disables FastLearn mode
normal: changes to normal learning mode
fast: enables FastLearn mode
cost <1-65535>
Enter the path cost of the spanning tree; range
is from 1 to 65535.
[priority {00 | 10 | < | F0}
Set the spanning tree priority for a port as a
hexadecimal value.
Setting default spanning tree values for ports
Use the following procedure to set the spanning tree values for the ports
within the specified Spanning Tree Group to the factory default settings.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To set default values, use the following command from Interface
Configuration mode:
default spanning-tree [port <portlist>] [stp <1-8>]
[learning] [cost] [priority]
--End--
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Creating and Managing STGs using the NNCLI
101
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
port <portlist>
Enable spanning tree for the specified port or
ports; enter port or ports to be set to factory
spanning tree default values.
ATTENTION
If this parameter is omitted, the system uses
the port number specified when the interface
command was used to enter Interface
Configuration mode.
stp <1-8>
Specify the Spanning Tree Group to set to
factory default values; enter the STG ID. This
command places the port into the default STG.
The default value for STG is 1.
learning
Set the spanning tree learning mode to the
factory default value.
The default value for learning is Normal mode.
cost
Set the path cost to the factory default value.
The default value for path cost depends on the
type of port.
priority
Set the priority to the factory default value.
The default value for the priority is 0x8000.
Disable spanning tree for a port
Use the following procedure to disable spanning tree for a port in a specific
Spanning Tree Group.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To disable, use the following command from Interface
Configuration mode:
no spanning-tree [port <portlist>] [stp <1-8>]
--End--
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
102
Configuring Spanning Tree Protocol using the NNCLI
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
port <portlist>
Disable spanning tree for the specified port or
ports; enter port or ports you want disabled for
STP.
ATTENTION
If this parameter is omitted, the system uses
the port number specified when the interface
command was used to enter the Interface
Configuration mode.
stp <1-8>
Disable the port in the specified Spanning Tree
Group; enter the STG ID.
Managing RSTP using the NNCLI
This section contains the following procedures:
Configuring RSTP parameters
Use the following procedure to set the RSTP parameters which include
forward delay, hello time, maximum age time, default path cost version,
bridge priority, transmit holdcount, and version for the bridge.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To configure RSTP parameters, use the following command in
Global Configuration mode:
spanning-tree rstp [ forward-time <4 - 30>]
[hello-time <1 - 10>] [max-age <6 - 40>]
[pathcost-type {bits16 | bits32}]
[priority {0000|1000|2000| ...| F000}]
[tx-holdcount <1 - 10>]
[version {stp-compatible | rstp}]
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
forward-time
<4- 30>
Set the RSTP forward delay for the bridge in seconds;
the default is 15.
hello-time
<1- 10>
Set the RSTP hello time delay for the bridge in
seconds; the default is 2.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Managing RSTP using the NNCLI
103
Variable
Value
max-age
<6 - 40>
Set the RSTP maximum age time for the bridge in
seconds; the default is 20.
pathcost-type
{bits16 | bits32}
Set the RSTP default path cost version; the default is
bits32.
priority {0000 | 1000 |
... | F000}
Set the RSTP bridge priority (in hex); the default is
8000.
tx-hold count
Set the RSTP Transmit Hold Count; the default is 3.
version
{stp-compatible | rstp}
Set the RSTP version; the default is rstp.
Configuring RSTP parameters per port
Use the following procedure to set the RSTP parameters, which include
path cost, edge-port indicator, learning mode, point-to-point indicator,
priority, and protocol migration indicator on the single or multiple port.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To configure RSTP parameters, use the following command from
Interface Configuration mode:
spanning-tree rstp [port <portlist>] [cost <1 200000000>][edge-port {false | true}]
[learning {disable | enable}]
[p2p {auto | force-false | force-true}]
[priority {00 | 10 | ... | F0}]
[protocol-migration {false | true}]
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
port <portlist>
Filter on list of ports.
cost <1 200000000>
Set the RSTP path cost on the single or multiple ports; the
default is 200000.
edge-port {false |
true}
Indicate whether the single or multiple ports are assumed
to be edge ports. This parameter sets the Admin value of
edge port status; the default is false.
learning {disable |
enable}
Enable or disable RSTP on the single or multiple ports; the
default is enable.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
104
Configuring Spanning Tree Protocol using the NNCLI
Variable
Value
p2p {auto |
force-false |
force-true}
Indicate whether the single or multiple ports are to be
treated as point-to-point links. This command sets the
Admin value of P2P Status; the default is force-true.
priority {00 | 10
|... |
F0}
Set the RSTP port priority on the single or multiple ports;
the default is 80.
protocol-migration
{false
| true}
Force the single or multiple port to transmit RSTP BPDUs
when set to true, while operating in RSTP mode; the default
is false.
Displaying RSTP bridge-level configuration details
Use the following procedure to display the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
(RSTP) related bridge-level configuration details.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To display configuration details, use the following command from
Privileged EXEC mode:
show spanning-tree rstp {config | status | statistics }
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
config
Display RSTP bridge-level configuration.
status
Display RSTP bridge-level role information.
statistics
Display RSTP bridge-level statistics.
Displaying RSTP port-level configuration details
Use the following procedure to display the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
(RSTP) related port-level configuration details.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To display configuration details, use the following command from
Privileged EXEC mode:
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Configuring RSTP SNMP traps using NNCLI
105
show spanning-tree rstp port {config | status |
statistics | role} [<portlist>]
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
config
Display RSTP port-level configuration.
status
Display RSTP port-level role information.
statistics
Display RSTP port-level statistics.
role
Display RSTP port-level status.
Configuring RSTP SNMP traps using NNCLI
RSTP SNMP traps feature provides the ability to receive SNMP notification
about RSTP protocol. These events are also logged to syslog.
The following events are generated:
•
nnRstNewRoot - a notification that is generated whenever a new root
bridge is selected in the topology.
•
nnRstTopologyChange - a notification that is generated whenever a
topology change is detected.
•
nnRstProtocolMigration - a notification that is generated whenever a
protocol migration appears on the port. There are two types of protocol
migration: STP BPDU or RSTP BPDU.
Use the following procedures to configure RSTP SNMP Traps when in
RSTP operating mode.
Enable RSTP SNMP traps
Use the following procedure to enable RSTP SNMP traps.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To enable RSTP SNMP Traps, use the following command from
Global Configuration mode:
[no]spanning-tree rstp traps
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
106
Configuring Spanning Tree Protocol using the NNCLI
Use the no form of this command to disable RSTP SNMP traps.
--End--
Reset RSTP SNMP traps settings to default
Use the following procedure to reset RSTP SNMP traps settings to default.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To restore RSTP SNMP traps settings to default, use the
following command from Global Configuration mode:
default spanning-tree rstp traps
Settings are returned to default values.
--End--
Verifying RSTP SNMP traps settings
Use the following procedure to verify RSTP SNMP traps settings.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To verify RSTP SNMP Traps settings, use the following
command from Privileged EXEC mode:
show spanning-tree rstp config
--End--
Job aid: Verifying RSTP SNMP traps output
#show spanning-tree rstp config
Stp Priority (hex): 8000
Stp Version: Rstp Mode
Bridge Max Age Time: 20 seconds
Bridge Hello Time: 2 seconds
Bridge Forward Delay Time: 15 seconds
Tx Hold Count: 3
Path Cost Default Type: 32-bit
STP Traps: Enabled
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Managing MSTP using NNCLI
107
Managing MSTP using NNCLI
This section contains the following procedures:
Configuring MSTP parameters for CIST Bridge
Use the following procedure to set the MSTP parameters, which include
maximum hop count, maximum number of instances allowed, forward
delay time, hello time, maximum age time, default path cost version,
priority, transmit hold count, and version for the CIST Bridge.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To configure MSTP parameters, use the following command
from Global Configuration mode:
spanning-tree MSTP [max-hop <100 - 4000>]
[forward-time <4 - 30>]
[max-age <6 - 40>]
[pathcost-type {bits16 | bits32}]
[priority {0000 | 1000 | 2000 | ... | F000}]
[tx-holdcount <1 - 10>]
[version {stp-compatible | rstp| MSTP}]
[add-vlan <1 - 4094>] [remove-vlan <1 - 4094>]
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
max-hop
<100 - 4000>
Set the MSTP maximum hop count for the CIST bridge;
the default is 2000.
forward-time
<4 - 30>
Set the MSTP forward delay for the CIST bridge in
seconds; the default is 15.
max-age
<6 - 40>
Set the MSTP maximum age time for the CIST bridge
in seconds; the default is 20.
pathcost-type
{bits16 | bits32}
Set the MSTP default path cost version; the default is
bits32.
priority {0000 |
1000|2000 ... | F000}
Set the MSTP bridge priority for the CIST Bridge; the
default is 8000.
tx-holdcount<1 - 10>
Set the MSTP Transmit Hold Count; the default is 3.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
108
Configuring Spanning Tree Protocol using the NNCLI
Variable
Value
version
{stp-compatible | rstp |
MSTP}
Set the MSTP version for the CIST Bridge; the default
is MSTP.
add-vlan
<1 - 4094>
Add a VLAN to the CIST bridge.
remove-vlan
<1 - 4094>
Remove the specified VLAN from the CIST bridge.
Configuring MSTP parameters for Common Spanning Tree
Use the following procedure to set the MSTP parameters, which include
path cost, hello time, edge-port indicator, learning mode, point-to-point
indicator, priority, and protocol migration indicator on the single or multiple
ports for the Common Spanning Tree.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To configure MSTP parameters, use the following command
from Interface Configuration mode:
spanning-tree MSTP [port <portlist>] [cost <1 200000000>][edge-port {false | true}][hello-time <1 10>]
[learning {disable | enable}][p2p {auto | force-false |
force-true}][priority {00 | 10 | < | F0}]
[protocol-migration {false | true}][instance-specific
<1-7>]
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
port <portlist>
Enter a list or range of port numbers.
cost <1 - 200000000>
Set the MSTP path cost on the single or multiple
ports for the CIST; the default is 200000.
hello-time
<1 - 10>
Set the MSTP hello time on the single or multiple
ports for the CIST; the default is 2.
edge-port {false | true}
Indicate whether the single or multiple ports are
assumed to be edge ports. This parameter sets
the Admin value of edge port status; the default is
false.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Managing MSTP using NNCLI
109
Variable
Value
learning {disable | enable}
Enable or disable MSTP on the single or multiple
ports; the default is enable.
p2p {auto |
force-false |
force-true}
Indicate whether the single or multiple ports are
treated as point-to-point links. This command
sets the Admin value of P2P Status; the default is
force-true.
priority {00 | 10 |... | F0}
Set the MSTP port priority on the single or multiple
ports; the default is 80.
protocol-migration {false |
true}
Force the single or multiple ports to transmit MSTP
BPDUs when set to true, while operating in MSTP
mode; the default is false.
instance-specific <1-7>
Set the MSTP instance-specific configuration in a
range from 1 to 7 (filter on the MSTP instance).
Configuring MSTP region parameters
Use the following procedure to set the MSTP parameters, which include
config ID selector, region name, and region version.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To configure MSTP parameters, use the following command
from Global Configuration mode:
spanning-tree MSTP region [config-id-sel <0 - 255>]
[region-name <1 - 32 chars>][region-version <0 - 65535>]
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
[config-id-sel
<0 - 255>]
Set the MSTP config ID selector; the default is 0.
[region-name
<1 - 32 chars>]
Set the MSTP region name; the default is the bridge
MAC address.
[region-version
<0 - 65535>]
Set the MSTP region version; the default is 0.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
110
Configuring Spanning Tree Protocol using the NNCLI
Configuring MSTP parameters for bridge instance
Use the following procedure to set the MSTP parameters, which include
forward delay time, hello-time, maximum hop count, priority, and VLAN
mapping for the bridge instance.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To configure MSTP parameters, use the following command
from Global Configuration mode:
spanning-tree MSTP MSTI <1 - 7>
[priority{0000|1000|...|F000}]
[add-vlan <vid>]
[remove-vlan <vid>]
[enable]
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
<1 - 7>
Filter on MSTP instance.
priority {0000 |
1000 |... | F000}
Set the MSTP priority for the bridge instance; the
default is 8000.
add-vlan <1 - 4094>
Map the specified Vlan and MSTP bridge instance.
remove-vlan
<1 - 4094>
Unmap the specified Vlan and MSTP bridge
instance.
enable
Enable the MSTP bridge instances.
Disabling a MSTP bridge instance
Use the following procedure to disable a MSTP bridge instance.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To disable, use the following command from Global
Configuration mode:
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Managing MSTP using NNCLI
111
no spanning-tree MSTP MSTI <1 - 7> enable
--End--
Deleting a MSTP bridge instance
Use the following procedure to delete a MSTP bridge instance.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To delete, use the following command from Global Configuration
mode:
no spanning-tree MSTP MSTI <1 - 7>
--End--
Displaying MSTP status by selected bridge
Use the following procedure to display Multi Spanning Tree Protocol
(MSTP) related status information known by the selected bridge.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To display information, use the following command from
Privileged EXEC mode:
show spanning-tree MSTP {config | status | statistics}
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
config
Display the MSTP-related bridge-level VLAN
and region information.
status
Display the MSTP-related bridge-level status
information known by the selected bridge.
statistics
Display the MSTP-related bridge-level
statistics.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
112
Configuring Spanning Tree Protocol using the NNCLI
Displaying MSTP CIST port information
Use the following procedure to display the Multi Spanning Tree Protocol
(MSTP) CIST Port information maintained by every port of the Common
Spanning Tree.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To display, use the following command from Privileged EXEC
mode:
show spanning-tree MSTP port {config | role | statistics
} [<portlist>]
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
<portlist>
Enter a list or range of port numbers.
config
Display the MSTP CIST port information
maintained by every port of the Common
Spanning Tree.
role
Display MSTP CIST related port role
information maintained by every port.
statistics
Display the MSTP CIST Port statistics
maintained by every port.
Displaying MSTP MSTI settings
Use the following procedure to display MSTP MSTI settings.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To display settings, use the following command from Global
Configuration mode:
show spanning-tree MSTP MSTI [config] [statistics] [port
{config | role | statistics}] <1 - 7>
--End--
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Managing MSTP using NNCLI
113
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
config
Display the MSTP instance-specific configuration
and the VLAN mapping port.
statistics
Display MSTP instance-specific statistics.
port {config | role |
statistics}
Display MSTP instance-specific port information:
• config: Display MSTI port configuration
•
•
<1 - 7>
role: Display MSTI port role information
statistics: Display MSTI port statistics
Specify the MSTI instance for which to display the
statistics.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
114
Configuring Spanning Tree Protocol using the NNCLI
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
115
.
Configuring ADAC using the NNCLI
You can configure ADAC-related settings using the NNCLI.
Configuring global ADAC settings
Use the following procedure to set global ADAC settings for a device.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To configure settings, use the following command from Global
Configuration mode:
adac [enable] [op-mode <untagged-frames-basic |
untagged-frames-advanced| tagged-frames>] [traps
enable]
[voice-vlan <1-4094>] [uplink-port <portlist>]
[call-server-port <port>]
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
enable
Enables ADAC on the device.
op-mode
<untagged-frames-basic|
untagged-frames-advanced |
tagged-frames >
Sets the ADAC operation mode to one of
the following:
•
untagged-frames-basic: IP Phones
send untagged frames, and the Voice
VLAN is not created.
•
untagged-frames-advanced: IP Phones
send untagged frames, and the Voice
VLAN is created.
•
tagged-frames: IP Phones send tagged
frames.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
116
Configuring ADAC using the NNCLI
Variable
Value
traps enable
Enables ADAC trap notifications.
voice-vlan <1-4094>
Sets the Voice VLAN ID. The assigned
VLAN ID must not previously exist.
uplink-port <portlist>
Sets the Uplink ports.
call-server-port <port>
Sets the Call Server ports.
Disabling ADAC
Use the following procedure to disable or clear ADAC for a device.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To disable or clear settings, use the following command from
Global Configuration mode:
no adac [enable] [traps enable] [voice-vlan]
[uplink-port] [call-server-port]
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
enable
Disables ADAC on the device.
traps enable
Disables ADAC trap notifications.
voice-vlan
Clears the Voice VLAN ID.
uplink-port
Clears the Uplink ports.
call-server-port
Clears Call Server ports.
Restoring default ADAC settings
Use the following procedure to restore default ADAC settings on a device.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To restore default settings, use the following command from
Global Configuration mode:
default adac [enable] [op-mode] [traps enable]
[voice-vlan] [uplink-port] [call-server-port]
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Configuring per port ADAC settings
If you do not specify any of the following parameters in the
default adac command, the command restores the default
settings for all of these parameters.
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
enable
Restores the default ADAC administrative
state (disabled).
call-server-port
Restores the default Call Server port (none).
op-mode
Restores the default ADAC operation mode
(Untagged Frames Basic).
traps enable
Restores the default state for ADAC
notifications (enabled).
uplink-port
Restores the default Uplink port (none).
voice-vlan
Restores the default Voice-VLAN ID (none).
Configuring per port ADAC settings
Use the following procedure to configure per port ADAC for a device.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To configure ADAC settings, use the following command from
Interface Configuration mode:
adac [port <portlist>] {[enable] [tagged-frames-pvid
(<1-4094>|no-change)] [tagged-frames-tagging
(tagAll|tagPvidOnly|untagPvidOnly|no-change)]}
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
port <portlist>
Ports to which to apply the ADAC
configuration.
enable
Enables ADAC on the port or ports
listed.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
117
118
Configuring ADAC using the NNCLI
Variable
Value
tagged-frames-pvid
<1-4094> | no-change
Sets Tagged-Frames PVID on the port
or ports listed.
Use no-change to keep the current
setting.
tagged-frames-tagging
tagAll | tagPvidOnly | untagPvidOnly |
no-change
Sets Tagged-Frames Tagging to
• tagAll
•
•
tagPvidOnly
untagPvidOnly
Use no-change to keep the current
setting.
Disable ADAC settings per port
Use the following procedure to disable ADAC settings per port.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To disable ADAC settings, use the following command from
Interface Configuration mode:
no adac [port <portlist>] [enable]
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
port <portlist>
Ports for which to disable ADAC.
enable
Disables ADAC on the port or ports
listed.
Configuring per port ADAC defaults for a specified port
Use the following procedure to configure per port ADAC defaults for a
specified port.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To configure defaults, use the following command from Interface
Configuration mode:
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Configuring the autodetection method
119
default adac [port <portlist>] [enable] [tagged-framespvid] [tagged-frames-tagging]
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
port <portlist>
Ports on which to apply the ADAC
defaults.
enable
Restores the port to the default ADAC
state: Disabled.
tagged-frames-pvid
Restores Tagged-Frames PVID on
the port or ports to the default setting:
no-change.
tagged-frames-tagging
Restores Tagged-Frames Tagging to
default setting: Untag PVID Only.
Configuring the autodetection method
Use the following procedure to configure the autodetection method, by
MAC address or using LLDP (IEEE 802.1ab).
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To configure the autodetection method, use the following
command from Interface Configuration mode:
adac detection [port <port-list>] {[mac][lldp]}
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
port <portlist>
Specifies the port or ports for which to
set the detection mode.
mac
Enables MAC-based detection. The
default setting is MAC enabled.
lldp
Enables LLDP (802.1ab) detection.
The default setting is LLDP enabled.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
120
Configuring ADAC using the NNCLI
Disabling autodetection
Use the following procedure to turn off the autodetection method for either
MAC address or LLDP.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To disable the autodetection method, use the following command
from Interface Configuration mode:
no adac detection [port <port-list>] {[mac][lldp]}
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
port <portlist>
Specifies the port or ports for which to
disable the detection mode.
mac
Disables the MAC address detection
mode.
lldp
Disables the LLDP detection mode.
Setting autodetection method to default
Use the following procedure to return the autodetection method to its
defaults. The default is to have both MAC and LLDP enabled.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To return to default, use the following command from Interface
Configuration mode:
default adac detection [port <port-list>] {[mac][lldp]}
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
port <portlist>
Specifies the port or ports to be
returned to the default; both MAC and
LLDP are enabled.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Restoring default ADAC setting for ports
Variable
Value
mac
MAC is enabled by default.
lldp
LLDP is enabled by default.
121
Configuring autodetection for a specified port
Use the following procedure to enable autodetection on specified ports.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To enable autodetection, use the following command from
Interface Configuration mode:
adac port <port-list> enable
--End--
Disabling autodetection on specified ports
Use the following procedure to disable autodetection on the specified
port(s).
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To disable autodetection, use the following command from
Interface Configuration mode:
no adac port <port-list> enable
--End--
Restoring default ADAC setting for ports
Use the following procedure to restore the default ADAC setting (disabled)
for the specified ports.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To restore the default setting (disabled), use the following
command from Global Configuration mode:
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
122
Configuring ADAC using the NNCLI
default adac [port <port-list>] enable
--End--
Adding a range of MAC addresses for autodetection
Use the following procedure to add a specified range to the table of MAC
addresses recognized as Nortel IP Phones by the autodetection process.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To add a range of addresses, use the following command on
Global Configuration mode:
adac mac-range-table low-end <MACaddress> high-end
<MACaddress>
--End--
Deleting a range of MAC addresses used by autodetection
Use the following procedure to delete an existing MAC address range used
by the autodetection process. If the low-end and high-end MAC address
values are not provided, the switch deletes all existing MAC address
ranges from the switch.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To delete a range of addresses, use the following command from
Global Configuration mode:
no adac mac-range-table low-end <MACaddress> high-end
<MACaddress>
--End--
Resetting supported MAC address ranges
Use the following procedure to restore all supported MAC address ranges
on the switch to their default values.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Displaying configured ADAC MAC ranges
123
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To reset to default values, use the following command from
Global Configuration mode:
default adac mac-range-table
--End--
Displaying global ADAC settings for a device
Use the following procedure to display global ADAC settings for a device.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To display settings, use the following command in Privileged
EXEC mode:
show adac
--End--
Displaying ADAC settings per port
Use the following procedure to display ADAC settings per port.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To display ADAC settings, use the following command from
Privileged EXEC mode:
show adac interface <interface-type> <slot/port>
--End--
Displaying configured ADAC MAC ranges
Use the following procedure to display the ADAC MAC ranges configured
on the switch.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
124
Configuring ADAC using the NNCLI
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To display ranges, use the following command from Privileged
EXEC mode:
show adac mac-range-table
--End--
Displaying detection mechanism configured per port
Use the following procedure to display the detection mechanism
configured per port.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To display the detection mechanism, use the following command
from Privileged EXEC mode:
show adac detection interface [<interface-type>][<int
erface-id>]
--End--
ADAC UFA configuration example
Figure 23 "ADAC UFA configuration example" (page 125) shows an
example of ADAC configured in Untagged-Frames-Advanced (UFA)
op-mode. (Call-server-port is used in this example, because the server is
directly connected to the 4500 series switch.)
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
ADAC UFA configuration example
125
Figure 23
ADAC UFA configuration example
Auto-Configuration (AC) is applied for call-server-port and telephony
ports. On telephony ports, AC is applied only when Nortel IP Phones are
detected. (Autodetection is based on MAC Address.) VLAN configuration
is made according to the selected op-mode (UFA):
•
Telephony port:
— - Membership = remove from all other VLANs, and add to
Voice-VLAN (since there is no reason for the port to be member
of more than the Voice VLAN)
— Tagging = Untagged
— PVID = Voice-VLAN
•
Call Server port:
— Membership = add to Voice-VLAN
— Tagging = Untagged
— PVID = Voice-VLAN
To configure the example shown in Figure 23 "ADAC UFA configuration
example" (page 125), you must perform the following tasks:
Step
Action
1
Configure the call-server port.
2
Configure voice-VLAN.
3
Configure Untagged-Frames-Advanced (UFA) op-mode.
4
Enable ADAC on all ports to which IP phones connect.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
126
Configuring ADAC using the NNCLI
5
Configure IP phones to send untagged traffic.
--End--
ADAC configuration commands
The following section describes the detailed NNCLI commands required to
carry out the configuration shown in Figure 23 "ADAC UFA configuration
example" (page 125).
(config)#adac call-server-port 7
(config)#adac voice-vlan 2
(config)#adac enable op-mode untagged-frames-advanced
(config)#interface fastEthernet all
(config)#interface fastEthernet 16,24
(config-if)#adac enable
Verifying new ADAC settings
The following section includes commands used to view ADAC
configuration settings and the expected responses for each.
Auto configuration settings
(config)#show adac interface 7,16,24
Port Auto-Detection Auto-Configuration
---- -------------- -----------------7 Disabled Applied
16 Enabled Applied
24 Enabled Applied
VLAN settings
(config)#show vlan
Id Name Type Protocol User PID Active IVL/SVL Mgmt ---------------------- -------- ---------------- -------- -----1 VLAN #1 Port None 0x0000 Yes IVL Yes Port Members: 1-15,17-23
2 Voice_VLAN Port None 0x0000 Yes IVL No Port Members: 7,16,24
(config)#show vlan interface info 7,16,24
Filter Filter
Untagged Unregistered Port Frames Frames PVID PRI Tagging
Name ---- -------- ------------ ---- --- ---------------------------7 No Yes 2 0 UntagAll Port 7
16 No Yes 2 0 UntagAll Port 16
24 No Yes 2 0 UntagAll Port 24
ADAC settings
(config)#show running-config
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Verifying new ADAC settings
!...
! *** ADAC *** Note information in this section.
!
no adac enable
no adac mac-range-table
interface FastEthernet ALL
adac port 24 enable
no adac port 1-23 enable
exit
adac mac-range-table low-end 00-0A-E4-01-10-20
00-0A-E4-01-23-A7
adac mac-range-table low-end 00-0A-E4-01-70-EC
00-0A-E4-01-84-73
adac mac-range-table low-end 00-0A-E4-01-A1-C8
00-0A-E4-01-AD-7F
adac mac-range-table low-end 00-0A-E4-01-DA-4E
00-0A-E4-01-ED-D5
adac mac-range-table low-end 00-0A-E4-02-1E-D4
00-0A-E4-02-32-5B
adac mac-range-table low-end 00-0A-E4-02-5D-22
00-0A-E4-02-70-A9
adac mac-range-table low-end 00-0A-E4-02-D8-AE
00-0A-E4-02-FF-BD
adac mac-range-table low-end 00-0A-E4-03-87-E4
00-0A-E4-03-89-0F
adac mac-range-table low-end 00-0A-E4-03-90-E0
00-0A-E4-03-B7-EF
adac mac-range-table low-end 00-0A-E4-04-1A-56
00-0A-E4-04-41-65
adac mac-range-table low-end 00-0A-E4-04-80-E8
00-0A-E4-04-A7-F7
adac mac-range-table low-end 00-0A-E4-04-D2-FC
00-0A-E4-05-48-2B
adac mac-range-table low-end 00-0A-E4-05-B7-DF
00-0A-E4-06-05-FE
adac mac-range-table low-end 00-0A-E4-06-55-EC
00-0A-E4-07-19-3B
adac mac-range-table low-end 00-0A-E4-08-0A-02
00-0A-E4-08-7F-31
adac mac-range-table low-end 00-0A-E4-08-B2-89
00-0A-E4-09-75-D8
adac mac-range-table low-end 00-0A-E4-09-BB-9D
00-0A-E4-09-CF-24
adac mac-range-table low-end 00-0A-E4-09-FC-2B
00-0A-E4-0A-71-5A
adac mac-range-table low-end 00-0A-E4-0A-9D-DA
00-0A-E4-0B-61-29
adac mac-range-table low-end 00-0A-E4-0B-BB-FC
00-0A-E4-0B-BC-0F
high-end
high-end
high-end
high-end
high-end
high-end
high-end
high-end
high-end
high-end
high-end
high-end
high-end
high-end
high-end
high-end
high-end
high-end
high-end
high-end
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
127
128
Configuring ADAC using the NNCLI
adac mac-range-table low-end 00-0A-E4-0B-D9-BE high-end
00-0A-E4-0C-9D-0D
adac traps enable
adac voice-vlan 2
adac call-server-port 7
no adac uplink-port
adac op-mode untagged-frames-advanced
adac enable
!
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
129
.
Configuring LACP and VLACP using
the NNCLI
Configuring LACP using the NNCLI
This section describes the procedures necessary to configure and manage
Link Aggregation using the Command Line Interface (NNCLI).
Displaying LACP settings
Use the following procedure to display system-wide LACP settings.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To display settings, use the following command from Privileged
EXEC mode:
show lacp system
--End--
Displaying per port LACP configuration information
Use the following procedure to display per port LACP configuration
information.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To display configuration information, use the following command
from Privileged EXEC mode:
show lacp port [<portList> | aggr <1-65535>]
--End--
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
130
Configuring LACP and VLACP using the NNCLI
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
<portList>
Enter the specific ports for which to display LACP
information.
aggr <1-65535>
Enter the aggregator value to display ports that are
members of it.
Displaying LACP port statistics
Use the following procedure to display LACP port statistics.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To display statistics, use the following command from Privileged
EXEC mode:
show lacp stats [<portList> | aggr <1-65535>]
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
<portList>
Enter the specific ports for which to display LACP
information.
aggr <1-65535>
Enter the aggregator value to display ports that are
members of it.
Clearing LACP port statistics
Use the following procedure to clear LACP port statistics.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To clear statistics, use the following command from Interface
Configuration mode:
lacp clear-stats <portList>
--End--
Displaying port debug information
Use the following procedure to display port debug information.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Configuring LACP using the NNCLI
131
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To display information, use the following command from
Privileged EXEC mode:
show lacp debug member [<portList>]
--End--
Displaying LACP aggregators or LACP trunks
Use the following procedure to display LACP aggregators or LACP trunks.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To display LACP aggregators or trunks, use the following
command from Privileged EXEC mode:
show lacp aggr <1-65535>
--End--
Configuring LACP system priority
Use the following procedure to set the system-wide LACP priority. The
factory default priority value is 32768.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To set the priority, use the following command from Global
Configuration mode:
lacp system-priority <0-65535>
2
To reset the priority level to default, use the following command
from Global Configuration mode:
default lacp system-priority
--End--
Enabling port aggregation mode
Use the following procedure to enable the port aggregation mode.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
132
Configuring LACP and VLACP using the NNCLI
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To enable the aggregation mode, use the following command
from Interface Configuration mode:
lacp aggregation [port <portList>] enable
2
To reset the aggregation mode to default, use the following
command from Interface Configuration mode:
default lacp aggregation
--End--
Disabling port aggregation mode
Use the following procedure to disable the port aggregation mode.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To disable, use the following command from Interface
Configuration mode:
no lacp aggregation [port <portList>] enable
--End--
Configuring administrative LACP key
Use the following procedure to configure the administrative LACP key for a
set of ports.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To configure the administrative LACP key, use the following
command from Interface Configuration mode:
lacp key [port <portList>] <1-4095>
2
To reset the LACP key value to default, use the following
command from Interface Configuration mode:
default lacp key
--End--
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Configuring LACP using the NNCLI
133
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
port <portList>
The ports to configure the LACP key for.
<1-4095>
The LACP key to use.
Configuring LACP mode of operation
Use the following procedure to configure the LACP mode of operations
for a set of ports.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To configure the mode, use the following command from
Interface Configuration mode:
lacp mode [port <portList>] {active | passive | off}
2
To reset the mode to default value, use the following command
from Interface Configuration mode:
default lacp mode
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
port <portList>
The ports for which the LACP mode is to be set.
{active | passive | off}
The type of LACP mode to set for the port. The LACP
modes are:
• active -- The port will participate as an active
Link Aggregation port. Ports in active mode send
LACPDUs periodically to the other end to negotiate
for link aggregation.
•
passive -- The port will participate as a passive
Link Aggregation port. Ports in passive mode send
LACPDUs only when the configuration is changed
or when its link partner communicates first.
•
off -- The port does not participate in Link
Aggregation.
LACP requires at least one end of each link to be in
active mode.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
134
Configuring LACP and VLACP using the NNCLI
Configuring per port LACP priority
Use the following procedure to configure the per-port LACP priority for a
set of ports.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To configure the priority, use the following command from
Interface Configuration mode:
lacp priority [port <portList>] <0-65535>
2
To reset the priority to default, use the following command from
Interface Configuration mode:
default lacp priority
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
port <portList>
The ports for which to configure LACP priority.
<0-65535>
The priority value to assign.
Configuring LACP periodic transmission timeout interval
Use the following procedure to configure the LACP periodic transmission
timeout interval for a set of ports.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To configure the timeout, use the following command from
Interface Configuration mode:
lacp timeout-time [port <portList>] {long | short}
2
To reset the timeout value to default, use the following command
from Interface Configuration mode:
default lacp timeout-time
--End--
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Configuring VLACP using the NNCLI
135
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
port <portList>
The ports for which to configure the timeout interval.
{long | short}
Specify the long or short timeout interval.
Configuring VLACP using the NNCLI
To configure VLACP using the NNCLI, refer to the following procedures:
ATTENTION
When you set VLACP parameters for a trunk port, the settings are applied to
all trunk members.
Enabling VLACP
Use the following procedure to globally enable VLACP for a device.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To enable VLACP, use the following command from Global
Configuration mode:
vlacp enable
--End--
Configuring multicast MAC address for VLACP
Use the following procedure to set the multicast MAC address used by
the device for VLACPDUs.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To configure the address, use the following command from
Global Configuration mode:
vlacp macaddress <macaddress>
--End--
Configuring VLACP parameters per port
Use the following procedure to configure VLACP parameters per port.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
136
Configuring LACP and VLACP using the NNCLI
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To configure VLACP parameters, use the following command in
Interface Configuration mode:
vlacp port <slot/port> [enable] [timeout
<long/short>] [fast-periodic-time <integer>]
[slow-periodic-time <integer>] [timeout-scale
<integer>]
[funcmac-addr <mac>] [ethertype <hex>]
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
<slot/port>
Specifies the slot and port number.
enable
Enables VLACP.
timeout <long/short>
Specifies whether the timeout control value
for the port is a long or short timeout.
•
long sets the port timeout value
to: (timeout-scale value) ×
(slow-periodic-time value).
•
short sets the port’s timeout
value to: (timeout-scale value) ×
(fast-periodic-time value).
For example, if the timeout is set to short
while the timeout-scale value is 5 and the
fast-periodic-time value is 500 ms, the
timer expires after 2500 ms.
Default is long.
fast-periodic-time
<integer>
Specifies the number of milliseconds
between periodic VLACPDU transmissions
using short timeouts.
The range is 400-20000 milliseconds.
Default is 500.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Configuring VLACP using the NNCLI
137
Variable
Value
slow-periodic-time
<integer>
Specifies the number of milliseconds
between periodic VLACPDU transmissions
using long timeouts.
The range is 10000-30000 milliseconds.
Default is 30000.
timeout-scale <integer>
Sets a timeout scale for the port, where
timeout = (periodic time) × (timeout-scale).
The range is 1-10. Default is 3.
Note: When you use fast-timers, you do
not use a timeout-scale of 1, because
this breaks the link continuity from
service due to the time taken to transmit
VLACPDU and for the partner to provide
a corresponding response. Nortel
recommends that you set the minimum
timeout-scale to 3.
Nortel also recommends that you use the
minimum setting of 5 for the timeout-scale
when using the fast-periodic-timer of 500
ms.
funcmac-addr <mac>
Specifies the address of the far-end
switch/stack configured to be the partner
of this switch/stack. If none is configured,
any VLACP-enabled switch communicating
with the local switch through VLACP PDUs
is considered to be the partner switch.
Note: VLACP has only one multicast
MAC address, configured using the vlacp
macaddress command, which is the
Layer 2 destination address used for the
VLACPDUs.
The port-specific funcmac-addr parameter
does not specify a multicast MAC address,
but instead specifies the MAC address of
the switch or stack to which this port is
sending VLACPDUs.
You are not always required to configure
funcmac-addr. If not configured, the first
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
138
Configuring LACP and VLACP using the NNCLI
Variable
Value
VLACP-enabled switch that receives the
PDUs from a unit assumes that it is the
intended recipient and processes the
PDUs accordingly.
If you want an intermediate switch
to drop VLACP packets, configure
the funcmac-addr parameter to the
desired destination MAC address. With
funcmac-addr configured, the intermediate
switches do not misinterpret the VLACP
packets.
ethertype <hex>
Sets the VLACP protocol identification
for this port. Defines the ethertype
value of the VLACP frame. The range is
8101-81FF. Default is 8103.
Disabling VLACP
Use the following procedure to disable VLACP for a device.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To disable VLACP, use the following command from Global
Configuration mode:
no vlacp enable
--End--
Resetting multicast MAC address for VLACP to default
Use the following procedure to reset the multicast MAC address used by
the device for VLACPDUs to the default value (01:80:c2:00:11:00).
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To reset the address to default, use the following procedure from
Global Configuration mode:
no vlacp macaddress
--End--
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Configuring VLACP using the NNCLI
139
Disabling VLACP on a port
Use the following procedure to disable VLACP on a port.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To disable VLACP, use the following command from Global
Configuration mode:
no vlacp <slot/port> [enable] [funcmac-addr]
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
<slot/port>
Specifies the slot and port number.
enable
Disables VLACP on the specified port.
funcmac-addr
Sets the funcmac-addr parameter to the
default value.
Displaying VLACP status
Use the following procedure to display the status of VLACP on a switch.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To display the status, use the following command from Privileged
EXEC mode:
show vlacp
--End--
Displaying VLACP configuration details for ports
Use the following procedure to display the VLACP configuration details for
a port or list of ports.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
To display configuration details, use the following command from
Privileged EXEC mode:
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
140
Configuring LACP and VLACP using the NNCLI
show vlacp interface <slot/port>
--End--
Among other properties, the show vlacp interface command displays
a column called HAVE PARTNER, with possible values of yes or no.
If HAVE PARTNER is yes when ADMIN ENABLED and OPER ENABLED are
true, then that port has received VLACPDUs from a port and those PDUs
were recognized as valid according to the interface settings.
If HAVE PARTNER is no, when ADMIN ENABLED and OPER ENABLED are
true then that port did not received any VLACPDUs yet.
If HAVE PARTNER is no, when ADMIN ENABLED is true and OPER
ENABLED is FALSE, then the partner for that port is down (that port
received at least one correct VLACPDU, but did not receive additional
VLACPDUs within the configured timeout period). In this case VLACP
blocks the port.
The show vlacp interface command is in the privExec command
mode.
As long as the VLACP functional address for a specific interface is not
changed when using the command (config-if)#vlacp port x funcmac-addr
H.H.H, the MAC address is displayed as 00:00:00:00:00:00. The MAC
address used for sending VLACP PDUs for an interface is the global
VLACP MAC address (01:80:c2:00:11:00). The VLACP global destination
MAC can be specified by the user. Setting a func-mac-addr on an
interface displays that address in the show vlacp interface instead of
00:00:00:00:00:00.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
141
.
Configuring VLANs using Device
Manager
The following sections detail how to create and manage a VLAN using
Device Manager (dm). VLAN creation and management is performed in
the VLANs dialog box.
Table 9 " VLANs Basic tab" (page 141) describes the fields on the Basic
tab of the dm VLANs dialog box.
Table 9
VLANs Basic tab
Variable
Value
Id
The VLAN ID for the VLAN.
IfIndex
The interface index number.
MacAddress
The MAC address assigned to the virtual interface of
the VLAN.
Routing
Displays whether routing is enabled (true or false).
Name
Name of the VLAN.
Color
An administratively assigned color code for the VLAN.
The value of this object is used by the VLAN Manager
GUI tool to select a color when it draws this VLAN on
the screen.
Type
Indicates the type of VLAN: byPort or byProtocolId.
PortMembers
Ports that are members of the VLAN.
ActiveMember
Set of ports that are currently active in the VLAN.
Active ports include all static ports and any dynamic
ports where the VLAN policy was met.
MSTPInstance
This field is only available when the switch is running
in MSTP mode.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
142
Configuring VLANs using Device Manager
Table 9
VLANs Basic tab (cont’d.)
Variable
Value
ProtocolId
Protocol for protocol-based VLANs. This value is taken
from the Assigned Numbers RFC. For port-based
VLANs, None is the displayed value.
UserDefinedPid
When rcVlanProtocolId is set to usrDefined(15) in a
protocol-based VLAN, this field represents the 16-bit
user-defined protocol identifier.
This section contains information about the following topics:
Setting VLAN Configuration Control
Use the following procedure to access VLAN Configuration Control.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From Device Manager, click VLAN.
2
Select VLANs. The VLAN dialog box appears.
3
Click the Setting tab. The VLAN Setting tab appears.
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
ManagementVlanId
Specifies the management VLAN ID.
VlanConfigControl
VlanConfigControl presents four selections.
• automatic: This selection automatically adds an untagged port
to a new VLAN and automatically removes it from any previous
VLAN membership. The PVID of the port is automatically
changed to the VID of the VLAN it joins. Since the port is first
added to the new VLAN and then removed from any previous
membership, the Spanning Tree Group participation of the port
is not disabled as long as the VLANs involved are in the same
Spanning Tree Group
•
autopvid: This selection functions in the same manner as
previous AutoPVID functionality. When an untagged port is
added to a new VLAN, the port is added to the new VLAN and
the PVID assigned to the new VID without removing it from any
previous VLAN memberships. Using this option, an untagged
port can have membership in multiple VLANs.
•
flexible: This selection functions in a similar manner to disabling
AutoPVID functionality. When this option is used, an untagged
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Creating a VLAN
Variable
143
Value
port can belong to an unlimited number of VLANs. Any new
additions of an untagged port to a new VLAN does not change
the PVID of that port.
•
strict: The factory default, this selection restricts the addition
of an untagged port to a VLAN if it is already a member of
another VLAN. To add an untagged port to a new VLAN, the
switch administrator must remove the port from all other VLANs
of which it is a member before adding it to the new VLAN. The
PVID of the port is changed to the new VID to which it was
added.
Enabling AutoPVID
A Port VLAN ID can be automatically assigned to any port by enabling the
AutoPVID functionality on the switch. To enable this functionality through
the dm, perform the following procedure.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From the menu, select Edit, Chassis.
The Chassis dialog box appears with the System tab selected.
2
On the System tab, select enabled in the AutoPVID field.
3
Click Apply.
--End--
Creating a VLAN
To create a VLAN, perform the following procedure.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From Device Manager menu, select VLAN, VLANs.
The VLANs dialog box appears.
2
Click Insert.
The Insert Basic dialog box for creating VLANs appears. This
dialog box appears with the Type field set to byPort.
3
Enter the identifier for the VLAN in the Id field. This value must
be a unique number between 2 and 4094.
4
Optionally, enter a name for the VLAN in the Name field.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
144
Configuring VLANs using Device Manager
5
Optionally, assign a color identifier to the VLAN in the Color
field.
6
Enter the value of the Spanning Tree Group to which the VLAN
will belong in the StgId field.
7
When in Nortel STPG mode, use the StgId menu to choose the
spanning tree group to which the VLAN is to belong. When in
MSTP mode, use the MSTPInstance list to select the CIST or
MSTI instance to which the VLAN is to belong.
8
Select the type of VLAN in the Type field.
a If the VLAN is to be port-based, select the byPort option
button.
b If the VLAN is to be protocol-based, select the byProtocolId
option button. This selection enables the ProtocolId field.
From this field select the protocol on which this VLAN will be
based. If it is to be based on a user-defined protocol, select
the usrDefined option button and enter the custom PID in the
UserDefinedPid field.
9
Click Insert.
--End--
Modifying a VLAN
After a VLAN is created, four types of information can be modified without
the need to recreate the VLAN:
1. VLAN Name
2. Color Identifier
3. Member Ports
4. Routing Status
To change the VLAN name, color identifier, or routing status, click in the
appropriate fields in the VLANs Basic tab and then click Apply. Note that if
you set the routing status to true, the MAC address assigned to the virtual
router interface of the VLAN is displayed in the MacAddress column of the
Basic tab.
To change the VLAN member ports, perform the following procedure.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
In the row that represents the VLAN that is to be modified,
double-click in the PortMembers field.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Diplaying VLAN groups
145
The Port Members screen appears.
2
Click the buttons that correspond to the ports that are to be
added or deleted from the VLAN. Click All to select all switch
ports.
3
Click Ok.
4
Click Apply.
--End--
Deleting VLANs
Use the following procedure to delete a VLAN.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From Device Manager menu, select VLAN, VLANs.
The VLANs dialog box appears with the Basic tab selected.
2
Select the VLAN to be deleted.
3
Click Delete. The Device Manager deletes the selected VLAN.
--End--
Diplaying VLAN groups
Using the following procedure to display VLAN groups:
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From Device Manager menu, select VLAN, VLANs.
The VLANs dialog box appears with the Basic tab selected.
2
Select the Groups tab.
3
The system provides information describing:
•
•
IpAddress - which IP Addresses are in the Group
IfIndex - which Interface Indexes are in the Group
--End--
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
146
Configuring VLANs using Device Manager
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
IpAddress
Multicast group Address (Class D) that others want to join. A group
address can be the same for many incoming ports.
IfIndex
An unique value to identify a physical interface or a logical interface
(VLAN), which has received Group reports from various sources.
MAC address table maintenance using Device Manager
Note: In certain situations, due to the hash algorithm used by switch
to store MAC addresses into memory, some MAC addresses may not
be learned.
You can flush the MAC address table using Device Manager. The
Managing MAC address forwarding database table section shows you to
clear the MAC address table, and to remove an address from the MAC
address table.
MAC address table maintenance using Device Manager navigation
•
•
“Flushing the MAC address table” (page 146)
•
•
•
“Clearing the MAC address table on a VLAN” (page 148)
“Clearing the MAC address table on a FastEthernet interface” (page
147)
“Clearing the MAC address table on trunk” (page 148)
“Clearing a single address from the MAC address table” (page 149)
Flushing the MAC address table
You can flush dynamically learned MAC addresses from the MAC address
forwarding table.
Procedure steps
Perform this procedure to flush the MAC address table.
Step
Action
1
Browse to Edit, Bridge, MAC Flush.
The MAC Flush dialog box appears.
2
Select flush in the FlushMacAddrTableAll box.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
MAC address table maintenance using Device Manager
3
147
Click Apply.
--End--
Variable definition
Use the data in the table to complete this procedure.
Variable
Value
FlushMacAddrTableAll
Setting this object to flush(1) flushes the CDT
MAC address table.
On retrieval, its value is always flush(1)
Clearing the MAC address table on a FastEthernet interface
You can flush the MAC address from specified ports.
Procedure steps
Perform this procedure to flush the MAC address from a specified port.
Step
Action
1
Browse to Edit, Bridge, MAC Flush.
The MAC Flush dialog box appears.
2
Click the tab corresponding to the FlushMacAddrTableByPor
tList box.
The s5AgSysFlushMacAddrTableByPortList dialog box appears.
3
Select the specific port.
Or
Click ALL to select all the ports.
4
Click OK .
5
From the MAC Flush dialog box, click Apply.
--End--
Variable definition
Use the information in the table to complete this procedure.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
148
Configuring VLANs using Device Manager
Variable
Value
FlushMacAddrTableByPortList
Setting this object flushes the CDT MAC
address for all ports specified in the value.
On retrieval, the value is the last value set.
By default the value is a zero-length octet string
.
Clearing the MAC address table on a VLAN
You can clear the MAC address on a VLAN.
Procedure steps
Perform this procedure to clear the MAC address on a VLAN.
Step
Action
1
Browse to Edit, Bridge, MAC Flush.
The MAC Flush dialog box appears.
2
Specify the VLAN in the FlushMacAddrTableByVlan field.
3
Click Apply.
--End--
Variable definition
Use the information in the table to complete this procedure.
Variable
Value
FlushMacAddrTableByVlan
Setting this object flushes the CDT
MAC address table for the specified
VLAN.
On retrieval, the value is the last value
set.
By default the value is 1.
Clearing the MAC address table on trunk
You can clear the MAC address table on a specific trunk.
Procedure steps
Perform this procedure to clear the MAC address on a Trunk.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
MAC address table maintenance using Device Manager
Step
Action
1
Browse to Edit, Bridge, MAC Flush.
The MAC Flush dialog box appears.
2
Specify the trunk in the FlushMacAddrTableByTrunk field.
3
Click Apply.
--End--
Variable definition
Use the information in the table to complete this procedure.
Variable
Value
FlushMacAddrTableByTrunk
Setting this object flushes the CDT MAC
address table for the specified trunk.
On retrieval, the value is the last value set.
By default the value is 1.
Clearing a single address from the MAC address table
You can remove a single address from the MAC address table.
Procedure steps
Perform this procedure to clear the MAC address on a Trunk.
Step
Action
1
Browse to Edit, Bridge, MAC Flush.
The MAC Flush dialog box appears.
2
Specify the address in the FlushMacAddrTableByAddress
field.
3
Click Apply.
--End--
Variable definition
Use the information in the table to complete this procedure.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
149
150
Configuring VLANs using Device Manager
Variable
Value
FlushMacAddrTableByAddress
Setting this object flushes the specified MAC
address from the CDT MAC address table.
On retrieval, its value is the last value set.
By default the value is 00:00:00:00:00:00 .
Configuring VLAN port properties
The Port - VLAN tab displays the VLAN membership for a port.
Use the following procedure to view the Port - VLAN tab.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From the Device View, select the port to edit.
2
From the menu, choose Edit, Port.
The Port dialog box appears.
3
Select the VLAN tab.
describes the VLAN tab fields.
4
Click Apply after making any changes.
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
VlanIds
The VLANIDs of which this port is a member.
DiscardUntagged
Frames
This field only applies to trunk ports. It acts as a flag
used to determine how to process untagged frames
received on this port. When the flag is set, the frames
are discarded by the forwarding process. When the
flag is reset, the frames are assigned to the VLAN
specified by rcVlanPortDefaultVlanId.
FilterUnregisteredFra
mes
This field only applies to access ports. It acts as a flag
used to determine how to process unregistered frames
received on this port. When the flag is set, the frames
are discarded by the forwarding process. When the
flag is reset, the frames are processed normally.
DefaultVlanId
The VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames received
on a trunk port.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Configuring VLAN port properties
Variable
Value
PortPriority
Sets the port as a priority for the switch to consider as
it forwards received packets.
Tagging
Indicates the type of VLAN port. A trunk port can be
a member of more than one VLAN. An access port
can be a member of only one VLAN, if no membership
conflict exists.
There are four types of VLAN port:
•
•
•
•
tagAll(trunk)
untagAll(access)
tagPvidOnly
untagPvidOnly
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
151
152
Configuring VLANs using Device Manager
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
153
.
Configuring Multi-Link Trunking using
Device Manager
Use Device Manager screens described in the following sections to create
and manage Multi Link Trunks:
Setting up MLTs
To create a MLT, perform the following procedure.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From Device Manager menu bar, choose VLAN, MLT/LACP.
The MLT_LACP dialog box appears with the Multi Link Trunks
tab displayed.
2
In the fields provided on the Multi Link Trunks tab, enter the
information necessary to complete the MLT.
3
Click Apply.
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
ID
The number of the MLT (assigned
consecutively). Displays the vlan based
on port selected.
PortType
The port type:
• Access
•
Trunk
Name
The name given to the MLT.
PortMembers
The ports that are assigned to the MLT.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
154
Configuring Multi-Link Trunking using Device Manager
Variable
Value
VlanIds
Specify the VLAN identifier.
Enable
Specify whether the Multi-Link trunk is active.
Loadbalance (Mode)
Specifies the mode of load balancing. Options
are basic and advanced.
Adding MLT Ports
To add ports to an MLT, perform the following procedure.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From Device Manager menu bar, choose VLAN, MLT/LACP.
The MLT_LACP dialog box appears with the Multi-Link Trunks
tab displayed.
2
Double-click in the PortMembers field for the MLT to which ports
are to be added. The PortMembers screen appears.
3
Click on the buttons that represent the ports that are to be added
to the MLT. For the 4500 Series, up to 4 same-type ports can
belong to a single MLT
4
Click Ok.
5
Click Apply. The selected ports are now displayed on the
MLT_LACP dialog box in the PortMembers field.
--End--
MultiLink Trunk statistics
Use the following procedure to view MLT interface statistics.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From Device Manager menu bar, choose VLAN, MLT/LACP.
The MLT_LACP dialog box opens with the MultiLink Trunks
tab displayed.
2
Select an MLT row and then click Graph.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
MultiLink Trunk statistics
155
The Statistics, MLT dialog box opens with the Interface tab
displayed.
--End--
Variable definitions
Field
Description
InMulticastPkts
The number of packets delivered to this MLT that were
addressed to a multicast address at this sublayer. For
a MAC layer protocol, this number includes both Group
and Functional addresses.
OutMulticastPkts
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols
requested be transmitted, and that were addressed to
a multicast address at this MLT, including those that
were discarded or not sent. For a MAC layer protocol,
this number includes both Group and Functional
addresses.
InBroadcastPkts
The number of packets delivered to this MLT that were
addressed to a broadcast address at this sublayer.
OutBroadcastPkts
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols
requested be transmitted, and that were addressed to
a broadcast address at this MLT, including those that
were discarded or not sent.
HCInOctets
The total number of octets received on the MLT
interface, including framing characters.
HCOutOctets
The total number of octets transmitted out of the MLT
interface, including framing characters.
HCInUcastPkts
The number of packets delivered by this MLT to a
higher MLT that were not addressed to a multicast or
broadcast address at this sublayer.
HCOutUcastPkts
The number of packets that high-level protocols
requested be transmitted that were not addressed to
a multicast address at this MLT. This total number
includes those packets discarded or unsent.
HCInMulticastPkt
The number of packets delivered to this MLT that were
addressed to a multicast address at this sublayer. For
a MAC layer protocol, this number includes both Group
and Functional addresses.
HCOutMulticast
The total number of packets that high-level protocols
requested be transmitted, and that were addressed to
a multicast address at this MLT, including those that
were discarded or not sent. For a MAC layer protocol,
this number includes both Group and Functional
addresses.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
156
Configuring Multi-Link Trunking using Device Manager
Field
Description
HCInBroadcastPkt
The number of packets delivered to this MLT that were
addressed to a broadcast address at this sublayer.
HCOutBroadcast
The total number of packets that high-level protocols
requested be transmitted, and that were addressed to
a broadcast address at this MLT, including those that
were discarded or not sent.
MultiLink Trunk Ethernet error statistics
Use the following procedure to view MultiLink Trunk Ethernet error
statistics.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From Device Manager menu bar, choose VLAN, MLT/LACP.
The MLT_LACP dialog box opens with the MultiLink Trunks
tab displayed.
2
Select an MLT by clicking anywhere within a field in the row.
3
Click Graph.
The Statistics, MLT dialog box opens with the Interface tab
displayed.
4
Click the Ethernet Errors tab. The Ethernet Errors tab opens.
--End--
Variable definitions
Field
Description
AlignmentErrors
A count of frames received on a particular MLT that are
not an integral number of octets in length and do not pass
the FCS check. The count represented by an instance of
this object is incremented when the alignmentError status
is returned by the MAC service to the LLC (or other MAC
user). Received frames for which multiple error conditions
occur are, according to the conventions of IEEE 802.3
Layer Management, counted exclusively according to the
error status presented to the LLC.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
MultiLink Trunk Ethernet error statistics
157
Field
Description
FCSErrors
A count of frames received on an MLT that are an integral
number of octets in length but do not pass the FCS check.
The count represented by an instance of this object is
incremented when the frameCheckError status is returned
by the MAC service to the LLC (or other MAC user).
Received frames for which multiple error conditions occur
are, according to the conventions of IEEE 802.3 Layer
Management, counted exclusively according to the error
status presented to the LLC.
IMacTransmit
Error
A count of frames for which transmission on a particular
MLT fails due to an internal MAC sublayer transmit error.
A frame is only counted by an instance of this object if it
is not counted by the corresponding instance of either the
LateCollisions object, the ExcessiveCollisions object, or the
CarrierSenseErrors object.
IMacReceive
Error
A count of frames for which reception on a particular MLT
fails due to an internal MAC sublayer receive error. A
frame is only counted by an instance of this object if it is
not counted by the corresponding instance of either the
FrameTooLongs object, the AlignmentErrors object, or the
FCSErrors object.
The precise meaning of the count represented by an
instance of this object is implementation specific. In
particular, an instance of this object may represent a count
of receive errors on a particular interface that are not
otherwise counted.
CarrierSense
Errors
The number of times that the carrier sense condition was
lost or never asserted when attempting to transmit a frame
on a particular MLT. The count represented by an instance
of this object is incremented at most once per transmission
attempt, even if the carrier sense condition fluctuates
during a transmission attempt.
FrameTooLong
A count of frames received on a particular MLT that exceed
the maximum permitted frame size. The count represented
by an instance of this object is incremented when the
frameTooLong status is returned by the MAC service
to the LLC (or other MAC user). Received frames for
which multiple error conditions occur are, according to the
conventions of IEEE 802.3 Layer Management, counted
exclusively according to the error status presented to the
LLC.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
158
Configuring Multi-Link Trunking using Device Manager
Field
Description
SQETestError
A count of times that the SQE TEST ERROR message is
generated by the PLS sublayer for a particular MLT. The
SQE TEST ERROR message is defined in section 7.2.2.2.4
of ANSI/IEEE 802.3-1985 and its generation is described in
section 7.2.4.6 of the same document.
Deferred
Transmiss
A count of frames for which the first transmission attempt
on a particular MLT is delayed because the medium is
busy. The count represented by an instance of this object
does not include frames involved in collisions.
SingleCollFrames
A count of successfully transmitted frames on a particular
MLT for which transmission is inhibited by exactly
one collision. A frame that is counted by an instance
of this object is also counted by the corresponding
instance of either the ifOutUcastPkts, ifOutMulticastPkts,
or ifOutBroadcastPkts, and is not counted by the
corresponding instance of the MultipleCollisionFrames
object.
MultipleColl
Frames
A count of successfully transmitted frames on a particular
MLT for which transmission is inhibited by more than
one collision. A frame that is counted by an instance
of this object is also counted by the corresponding
instance of either the ifOutUcastPkts, ifOutMulticastPkts,
or ifOutBroadcastPkts, and is not counted by the
corresponding instance of the SingleCollisionFrames
object.
LateCollisions
The number of times that a collision is detected on a
particular MLT later than 512 bit-times into the transmission
of a packet. Five hundred and twelve bit-times corresponds
to 51.2 microseconds on a 10 Mb/s system. A (late)
collision included in a count represented by an instance of
this object is also considered as a (generic) collision for
purposes of other collision-related statistics.
ExcessiveCollis
A count of frames for which transmission on a particular
MLT fails due to excessive collisions.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
159
.
Configuring Spanning Tree Protocol
using Device Manager
Setting the STP mode using Device Manager
Use the following procedure to set the STP operational mode using Device
Manager.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From Device Manager menu bar, choose VLAN, Spanning
Tree, Globals.
The Spanning Tree dialog box appears with the Globals tab
displayed.
2
In the SpanningTreeAdminMode field, select the STP mode.
The available modes are:
•
•
•
3
nortelStpg
rstp
MSTP
Click Apply.
A warning message appears reminding you that you must reset
the switch for the change to take effect.
4
Click Yes.
5
Click Close.
6
To reset the switch, choose Edit, Chassis.
7
From the System tab, choose the reboot option and click
Apply.
--End--
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
160
Configuring Spanning Tree Protocol using Device Manager
Configuring STP BPDU Filtering using Device Manager
You can use the STP BPDU-Filtering tab to configure STP BPDU Filtering
on a port. This tab is available in all three STP modes.
Use the following procedure to configure STP BPDU Filtering:
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
Select a port from Device Manager and then select Edit, Port
The Port dialog box appears with the Interface tab displayed.
2
Click the STP BPDU-Filtering tab.
The STP BPDU-Filtering tab appears.
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
AdminEnabled
Enables and disables BPDU filtering
on the port.
OperEnabled
Indicates the current operational status
of BPDU filtering on the port: true
(enabled) or false (disabled).
Timeout
When BPDU filtering is enabled, this
indicates the time (in 1/100 seconds)
during which the port remains disabled
after it receives a BPDU. The port
timer is disabled if this value is set to
0. The default value is 12000 (120
seconds).
TimerCount
Displays the time remaining for the
port to stay in the disabled state after
receiving a BPDU.
Creating and Managing STGs using Device Manager
You can use Device Manager (dm) screens described in this section to
create and manage Spanning Tree Groups.
ATTENTION
The STG dialog boxes and tabs described in this section are accessible only
when the STP mode is set to Nortel STPG.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Creating and Managing STGs using Device Manager
161
Configuring STG global properties
Use the following procedure to configure the STG global properties.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From Device Manager menu, choose VLAN, Spanning Tree,
STG.
The STG dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed.
2
Select the STP path cost calculation mode:
•
•
3
ieee802.1dCompatible
ieee802.1tCompatible
Select the STP port mode:
•
•
4
normal
auto
Click Apply.
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
SpanningTreePathCostCalculationMode
The current spanning-tree path
cost calculation mode. The value
ieee802dot1dCompatible is valid
only when the switch is running in
Nortel STPG mode.
SpanningTreePortMode
The STG port membership mode
for all Spanning Tree Groups on
the switch.
Creating an STG
Use the following procedure to create a Spanning Tree Group.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From Device Manager menu, choose VLAN, Spanning Tree,
STG.
The STG dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
162
Configuring Spanning Tree Protocol using Device Manager
2
Click the Configuration tab.
The Configuration tab appears .
3
Click Insert.
The Insert Configuration dialog box appears.
4
In the fields provided, fill in the information for the new STG.
The following table describes the fields in the STG Insert
Configuration dialog box .
5
Click Insert. The new STG appears on the STG Configuration
tab.
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
Id
Enter an integer between 1 and 8 that
identifies the STG; 1 is the default STG.
Priority
Enter the first two octets of the 8-octet bridge
ID; the range is 0 to 65535.
BridgeMaxAge
Enter the maximum time you want to allow
before the specified STG times out, in
seconds; the range, measured in hundredths
of a second, is 600 (6 seconds) to 4000 (40
seconds).
BridgeHelloTime
Enter the maximum time between hellos, in
seconds; the range, measured in hundredths
of a second, is 100 (1 second) to 1000 (10
seconds).
BridgeForwardDelay
Enter the maximum delay in forwarding, in
seconds; the range, measured in hundredths
of a second) is 400 (4 seconds) to 3000 (30
seconds).
TaggedBpduVlanId
Enter the VLAN ID for tagged BPDUs.
Adding a VLAN to an STG
When using Device Manager, a VLAN can only be added to an STG at the
time the VLAN is created.
Use the following procedure to add a VLAN to an STG:
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Creating and Managing STGs using Device Manager
163
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
If it does not already exist, create the STG to which you want to
add the VLAN.
2
Create the VLAN, making sure to select the desired StgId on the
Insert VLAN screen.
3
Open the VLAN dialog box and view the Basic tab to confirm
that the StgId field for the VLAN is the correct STG.
--End--
Moving a VLAN between STGs
You cannot use Device Manager to move VLANs between STGs on the
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series. Instead, delete the VLAN to
be moved and add a replacement VLAN in the STG to which you want to
move the VLAN.
Deleting a STG
Use the following procedure to delete a STG.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From the menu, select VLAN, Spanning Tree, STG.
2
On the Configuration tab, select the STGs to be deleted.
3
Click Delete.
--End--
Displaying STG Status
Use the following procedure to display the status of a STG.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From the menu, select VLAN, Spanning Tree, STG .
The STG dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed.
2
Select the Status tab.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
164
Configuring Spanning Tree Protocol using Device Manager
The status of all current STGs is displayed.
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
Id
Display the STG ID.
BridgeAddress
Display the MAC address used by this bridge.
NumPorts
Display the number of ports controlled by this
bridging entity.
ProtocolSpecification
Display the version of spanning tree that is
running.
TimeSinceTopology
Change
Display the time, in hundredths of seconds,
since the last topology change.
TopChanges
Display the number of topology changes since
the switch was reset.
DesignatedRoot
Display the MAC address of the STP
designated root.
RootCost
Display the cost of the path to the root.
RootPort
Display the port number of the port with the
lowest-cost path from this bridge to the root
bridge.
MaxAge
Display the maximum age, in hundredths of a
second, of STP information learned from any
port in the network before the information is
discarded.
HelloTime
Display the amount of time, in hundredths of
seconds, between Hello messages.
HoldTime
Display the interval, in hundredths of seconds,
during which no more than two Hello
messages can be transmitted.
ForwardDelay
Display the interval, in hundredths of seconds,
during which the switch stays in Listening or
Learning mode, before moving to Forwarding
mode. This value is also used to age dynamic
entries in the Forwarding Database.
Displaying STG ports
Use the following procedure to display STG port status.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Creating and Managing STGs using Device Manager
165
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From the menu, select VLAN, Spanning Tree, STG .
The STG dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed.
2
Click the Ports tab.
3
View the information and, if desired, change the information in
the Ports tab by entering updated information and by using the
menus provided.
4
Click Apply.
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
<Untitled Column>
Display the unit and port number.
StgId
Display the STG ID number.
Priority
Specify the port priority
State
Display the STP state of the port: Disabled,
Blocking, Listening, Learning, Forwarding.
EnableStp
Enable or disable STP on the port: True is
enabled, and False is disabled.
FastStart
Enable or disable Fast Start STP on the
port: True is enabled, and False is disabled.
AdminPathCost
Sets the PathCost value. The field displays
0 if no user-configured value exists.
PathCost
Display the contribution of this port to the
cost path of the spanning tree root.
DesignatedRoot
Display the MAC address of the STP
designated root.
DesignatedCost
Display the path cost of the designated port
of the segment connected to this port.
DesignatedBridge
Display the MAC address of the designated
bridge this port considers the designated
bridge for this segment.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
166
Configuring Spanning Tree Protocol using Device Manager
Variable
Value
DesignatedPort
Display the port ID of the designated bridge
for this port segment.
ForwardTransitions
Display the number of times the port
transitioned from STP Learning to
Forwarding state.
Configuring STG port properties
The Port - STG tab displays the spanning tree parameters for a port.
To view the STG tab, perform the following procedure.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
Select a port from Device Manager and then select Edit, Port
2
From the menu, select Edit, Port .
The Port screen appears.
3
Select the STG tab.
4
Click Apply after making any changes.
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
StgId
The spanning tree group ID to which the VLAN
belongs.
Priority
The value of the priority field that is contained in the
first (in network byte order) octet of the (2-octet long)
Port ID. The other octet of the Port ID is derived from
the value of dot1dStpPort.
State
The current port state as defined by application of the
Spanning Tree Protocol. This state controls the action
a port takes when it receives a frame. If the bridge
detects a port that is malfunctioning, it places that port
into the broken state. For ports that are disabled (see
EnableStp), this object has a value of Disabled.
EnableStp
Select True or False to enable or disable STP.
Select True or False to enable or disable FastStart.
FastStart
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Configuring RSTP using Device Manager
167
Variable
Value
AdminPathCost
The administrative value of the PathCost. This is the
value that has been configured by the user, or 0 if no
user-configured value exists. If you specify the path
cost in the PathCost field, the value in this field is
modified as well.
PathCost
The contribution of this port to the cost of paths
toward the spanning tree root, which includes this
port. The IEEE 802.1D-1990 standard recommends
that the default value of this parameter be in inverse
proportion to the speed of the attached LAN.
DesignatedRoot
The unique Bridge Identifier of the bridge recorded as
the Root in the Configuration BPDUs transmitted by
the Designated Bridge for the segment to which the
port is attached.
DesignatedCost
The path cost of the Designated Port of the segment
connected to this port. This value is compared to the
Root Path Cost field in received bridge PDUs.
DesignatedBridge
The Bridge Identifier of the bridge that this port
considers to be the Designated Bridge for this port
segment.
DesignatedPort
The Port Identifier of the port on the Designated
Bridge for this port segment.
ForwardTransitions
The number of times this port has transitioned from
the Learning state to the Forwarding state.
Configuring RSTP using Device Manager
The Rapid Spanning Tree protocol (RSTP or IEEE 802.1w) reduces the
recovery time after a network breakdown. It also maintains a backward
compatibility with the IEEE 802.1d which was the Spanning Tree
implementation prior to RSTP. In certain configurations, the recovery time
of RSTP can be reduced to less than 1 second.
RSTP also reduces the amount of flooding in the network by enhancing
the way the Topology Change Notification (TCN) packet is generated.
ATTENTION
The RSTP dialog boxes and tabs described in this section are accessible only
when the STP mode is set to RSTP.
This section contains information on the following topics:
Viewing the RSTP Globals tab
The Globals tab in the RSTP dialog box provides general information
about RSTP when RSTP is the active mode.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
168
Configuring Spanning Tree Protocol using Device Manager
Use the following procedure to view the Globals tab.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From Device Manager menu bar, choose VLAN, Spanning
Tree, RSTP.
The RSTP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed.
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
PathCostDefault
Set the version of the Spanning Tree default Path
Costs that the Bridge uses.
The value of 16-bit uses the 16-bit default Path Costs
from IEEE Std. 802.1D-1998.
A value of 32-bit uses the 32-bit default Path Costs
from IEEE Std. 802.1t.
TXHoldCount
The value used by the Port Transmit state machine to
limit the maximum transmission rate. The value can
range from 1 to 10.
Version
The version of the Spanning Tree Protocol the bridge
is currently running:
• stpCompatible: indicates that the bridge uses the
Spanning Tree Protocol specified in IEEE 802.1D.
•
rstp: indicates that the bridge uses the Rapid
Spanning Tree Protocol specified in IEEE 802.1w.
Priority
The value of the writable portion of the Bridge
Identifier comprising the first two octets. The values
that are set for Priority must be in steps of 4096.
BridgeMaxAge
The value in 1/100 seconds that all bridges use for
MaxAge when this bridge acts as the root. The value
must be a multiple of 100. The range is 600 to 4000.
BridgeHelloTime
The value in 1/100 seconds that all bridges use for
HelloTime when this bridge acts as the root. The
value must be a multiple of 100. The range is 100 to
1000.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Configuring RSTP using Device Manager
Variable
Value
BridgeForward
Delay
The value in 1/100 seconds that all bridges use
for ForwardDelay when this bridge is acting as
the root. Note that 802.1D-1990 specifies that the
range for this parameter is related to the value of
BridgeMaxAge. The value must be a multiple of 100.
The range is 400 to 3000.
DesignatedRoot
The unique identifier of the Bridge recorded as the
Root in the Configuration BPDUs that are transmitted
by the Designated Bridge for the segment to which
the port is attached. Reference IEEE 802.1D-1990:
Section 4.5.5.4.
RootCost
The cost of the path to the root as seen from this
bridge.
RootPort
The port number of the port that offers the lowest cost
path from this bridge to the root bridge.
MaxAge
The maximum age of Spanning Tree Protocol
information learned from the network on any port
before being discarded. The maximum age is
specified in units of hundredths of a second. This is
the actual value that the bridge uses.
HelloTime
The amount of time required for transmission of the
configuration BPDUs by the node on any port when
it is the root of the spanning tree or trying to become
the root. This is specified in units of hundredths of a
second. This is the actual value that the bridge uses.
ForwardDelay
This time value, measured in units of hundredths of a
second, controls how fast a port changes its spanning
state when moving towards the Forwarding state. The
value determines how long the port stays in each of
the Listening and Learning states, which precede the
Forwarding state.
RstpUpCount
The number of times the RSTP Module has been
enabled. A trap is generated on the occurrence of this
event.
RstpDownCount
The number of times the RSTP Module has been
disabled. A trap is generated on the occurrence of
this event
NewRootIdCount
The number of times this Bridge has detected a
Root Identifier change. A trap is generated on the
occurrence of this event.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
169
170
Configuring Spanning Tree Protocol using Device Manager
Variable
Value
TimeSinceTopologyCh
ange
The time (in hundredths of a second) since the
TcWhile Timer for any port in this Bridge was
non-zero for the Common Spanning Tree context.
TopChanges
The total number of topology changes detected by
this bridge since the management entity was last
reset or initialized.
Viewing the RSTP Ports tab
Use the following procedure to view the RSTP Ports tab.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From Device Manager menu bar, choose VLAN, Spanning
Tree, RSTP.
The RSTP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed.
2
Click the RSTP Ports tab.
The RSTP Ports tab appears.
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
Port
The port number.
State
The port state in this RSTP instance. The port state
is cataloged as discarding, learning, and forwarding.
Priority
The value of the priority field which is contained in
the first (in network byte order) octet of the (2 octet
long) Port ID.
PathCost
The contribution of this port to the cost of paths
towards the spanning tree root.
ProtocolMigration
The Protocol migration state of this port. Set this
field to true to force the port to transmit RSTP
BPDUs. Note: If this field is set to true and the
port receives an 802.1d type BPDU, the port again
begins transmitting 802.1d BPDUs.
AdminEdgePort
The administrative value of the Edge Port
parameter. A value of true indicates that this port
is assumed to be an edge-port and a value of
false indicates that this port is assumed to be a
nonedge-port.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Configuring RSTP using Device Manager
Variable
Value
OperEdgePort
The operational value of the Edge Port parameter.
The object is initialized to false on reception of a
BPDU.
AdminPointToPoint
The administrative point-to-point status of the LAN
segment attached to this port.
•
A value of forceTrue indicates that this port
is always treated as being connected to a
point-to-point link.
•
A value of forceFalse indicates that this port is
treated as having a shared media connection.
•
A value of auto indicates that this port is
considered to have a point-to-point link if it
is an Aggregator and all of its members are
aggregatable, or if the MAC entity is configured
for full duplex operation, either through
auto-negotiation or by management means.
OperPointToPoint
The operational point-to-point status of the
LAN segment attached to this port. This field
indicates whether a port is considered to have a
point-to-point connection. The value is determined
by management or by autodetection.
Participating
This field specifies whether a port is participating in
the 802.1w protocol.
DesignatedRoot
The bridge identifier of the old root of the Spanning
Tree as determined by the Spanning Tree Protocol
as executed by this node.
DesignatedCost
The path cost of the Designated Port of the
segment connected to this port. This value is
compared to the Root Path Cost field in received
BPDUs.
DesignatedBridge
The Bridge Identifier of the bridge which this port
considers to be the Designated Bridge for this port
segment.
DesignatedPort
The Port Identifier for the port segment which is on
the Designated Bridge.
ForwardTransitions
The number of times this port has transitioned from
the Learning state to the Forwarding state.
Viewing the RSTP Status tab
Use the following procedure to view the RSTP Status tab
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
171
172
Configuring Spanning Tree Protocol using Device Manager
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From Device Manager menu bar, choose VLAN, Spanning
Tree, RSTP.
The RSTP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed.
2
Click the RSTP Status tab.
The RSTP Status tab appears.
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
Port
The port number.
Role
A role represents a functionality characteristic
or capability of a resource to which policies are
applied.
OperVersion
This indicates whether the Port is operationally
in the RSTP mode or the STP-compatible
mode; that is, whether the Port is transmitting
RSTP BPDUs or Config/TCN BPDUs.
EffectivePortState
This is the effective Operational state of the
port. This object is set to true only when
the port is operationally up in the interface
manager and when the force Port State and
specified port state for this port is enabled.
Otherwise, this object is set to false.
Graphing RSTP Port Statistics
You can use the RSTP Stats tab to graph RSTP port statistics.
Use the following procedure to open the RSTP Stats tab for graphing.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From Device Manager menu bar, choose VLAN, Spanning
Tree, RSTP.
The RSTP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed.
2
Click the RSTP Status tab.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Configuring MSTP using Device Manager
3
173
Select a port and click Graph to get the statistics for the RSTP
Port.
The RSTP Stats tab appears.
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
RxRstBpduCount
The number of RST BPDUs that have
been received on the port.
RxConfigBpduCount
The number of Config BPDUs that have
been received on the port.
RxTcnBpduCount
The number of TCN BPDUs that have
been received on the port.
TxRstBpduCount
The number of RST BPDUs that have
been transmitted by this port.
TxConfigBpduCount
The number of Config BPDUs that have
been transmitted by this port.
TxTcnBpduCount
The number of TCN BPDUs that have
been transmitted by this port.
InvalidRstBpduRxCount
The number of invalid RSTP BPDUs that
have been received on this port.
InvalidConfigBpduRxCount
The number of invalid Configuration
BPDUs that have been received on this
port.
InvalidTcnBpduRxCount
The number of invalid TCN BPDUs that
have been received on this port.
ProtocolMigrationCount
The number of times this Port has
migrated from one STP protocol version
to another. The relevant protocols are
STP-COMPATIBLE and RSTP.
Configuring MSTP using Device Manager
With the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP or IEEE 802.1s), you can
configure multiple instances of RSTP on the same switch. Each MSTP
instance can include one or more VLANs. The operation of the MSTP is
similar to the current Nortel proprietary STG.
In the MSTP mode, the 4500 Series switches support a maximum of one
Common and Internal Spanning Tree (CIST) and seven Multiple Spanning
Tree Instances (MSTI).
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
174
Configuring Spanning Tree Protocol using Device Manager
Within the CIST, the Internal Spanning Tree component is used only by
devices from the same region (for which a regional root is elected). The
Common (External) Spanning Tree component of the CIST is used by
devices from different regions or between devices with different STP
modes.
ATTENTION
The MSTP dialog boxes and tabs described in this section are accessible only
when the STP mode is set to MSTP.
This section contains information on the following topics:
Viewing the MSTP Globals tab
Use the following procedure to view the MSTP Globals tab.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From Device Manager menu bar, choose VLAN, Spanning
Tree, MSTP.
The MSTP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed.
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
PathCostDefaultType
The version of the Spanning Tree default Path
Costs that are used by this Bridge. A 16-bit
value uses the 16-bit default path costs from
IEEE Standard 802.1D-1998. A 32-bit value
uses the 32-bit default path costs from IEEE
Standard. 802.1t.
TxHoldCount
The value used by the Port Transmit state
machine to limit the maximum transmission
rate.
MaxHopCount
The Maximum Hop Count value in 1/100
seconds. The value must be a multiple of 100.
The range is 100 to 4000.
NoOfInstancesSupported
The maximum number of spanning tree
instances supported.
MSTPUpCount
The number of times the MSTP Module
is enabled. A trap is generated on the
occurrence of this event.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Configuring MSTP using Device Manager
Variable
Value
MSTPDownCount
The number of times the MSTP Module
is disabled. A trap is generated on the
occurrence of this event.
ForceProtocolVersion
Signifies the version of the spanning tree
protocol that the bridge is currently running.
• stpCompatible indicates that the bridge
is using the Spanning Tree Protocol as
specified in IEEE 802.1D.
•
rstp indicates that the bridge is using the
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol as specified
in IEEE 802.1w.
•
MSTP indicates that the bridge is running
the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol as
specified in IEEE 802.1s.
BrgAddress
The bridge address is generated when events
like protocol up or protocol down occurs.
Root
The bridge identifier of the root of the common
spanning tree as determined by the Spanning
Tree Protocol as executed by this node. This
value is used as the CIST Root Identifier
parameter in all Configuration BPDUs
originated by this node.
RegionalRoot
The bridge identifier of the root of the Multiple
Spanning Tree region as determined by the
Spanning Tree Protocol as executed by this
node. This value is used as the CIST Regional
Root Identifier parameter in all Configuration
Bridge PDUs originated by this node.
RootCost
The cost of the path to the CIST Root as seen
from this bridge.
RegionalRootCost
The cost of the path to the CIST Regional Root
as seen from this bridge.
RootPort
The port number of the port which offers the
lowest path cost from the bridge to the CIST
Root Bridge
BridgePriority
The value of the writable portion of the Bridge
Identifier comprising the first two octets. The
values that are set for Bridge Priority must be
in steps of 4096.
BridgeMaxAge
The value in hundredths of a second that all
bridges use for MaxAge when this bridge acts
as the root. The value must be a multiple of
100. The range is 600 to 4000.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
175
176
Configuring Spanning Tree Protocol using Device Manager
Variable
Value
BridgeForwardDelay
The value in hundredths of a second that all
bridges use for ForwardDelay when this bridge
acts as the root. IEEE 802.1D specifies that
the range for this parameter is related to the
value of BridgeMaxAge. The value must be a
multiple of 100. The range is 400 to 3000.
HoldTime
This value determines the time interval during
which no more than two Configuration BPDUs
can be transmitted by this node. This value is
measured in units of hundredths of a second.
MaxAge
The maximum age, in hundredths of a second,
of the Spanning Tree Protocol information
learned from the network on any port before
being discarded. This value is the actual value
that this bridge is currently using.
ForwardDelay
This value controls how fast a port changes
its STP state when moving towards the
Forwarding state. This value determines
how long the port stays in a particular state
before moving to the next state. This value is
measured in units of hundredths of a second.
TimeSinceTopology
Change
The time, in hundredths of a second, since
the TcWhile Timer for any port in this Bridge
was non-zero for the Common Spanning Tree
context.
TopChanges
The number of times that at least one non-zero
TcWhile Timer occurred on this Bridge for the
Common Spanning Tree context.
NewRootBridgeCount
The number of times this Bridge detects a
Root Bridge change for the Common Spanning
Tree context. A Trap is generated when this
event occurs.
RegionName
Specify the region name of the configuration.
By default, the Region Name is equal to the
Bridge Mac Address.
RegionVersion
The version of the MST Region.
ConfigIdSel
The Configuration Identifier Format Selector
used by the Bridge. This has a fixed value of 0
which indicates RegionName, RegionVersion,
as specified in the standard.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Configuring MSTP using Device Manager
177
Variable
Value
ConfigDigest
Signifies the Configuration Digest value for
this Region. This is an MD5 digest value and
hence must always be 16 octets long.
RegionConfigChange
Count
The number of times a Region Configuration
Identifier Change is detected. A trap is
generated when this event occurs.
Displaying the CIST Port tab
Use the following procedure to view the CIST Port tab.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From Device Manager menu bar, choose VLAN, Spanning
Tree, MSTP.
The MSTP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed.
2
Click the CIST Port tab.
The CIST Port tab appears.
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
Port
The port number of the port containing
Spanning Tree information.
PathCost
The contribution of this port to the cost of paths
towards the CIST Root.
Priority
The four most significant bits of the Port
Identifier of the Spanning Tree instance. It can
be modified by setting the CISTPortPriority
value. The values that are set for Port Priority
must be in steps of 16.
DesignatedRoot
This field specifies the unique Bridge Identifier
of the bridge. Recorded as the CIST Root
in the configuration BPDUs which are
transmitted.
DesignatedCost
The path cost of the Designated Port of the
segment connected to this port.
DesignatedBridge
The unique Bridge Identifier of the bridge
which the port considers to be the Designated
Bridge for the port segment.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
178
Configuring Spanning Tree Protocol using Device Manager
Variable
Value
DesignatedPort
The Port identifier of the port on the
Designated Bridge which is designated for the
port segment.
RegionalRoot
Display the unique Bridge Identifier of the
bridge. Recorded as the CIST Regional Root
Identifier in the configuration BPDUs which are
transmitted.
RegionalPathCost
The contribution of this port to the cost of paths
towards the CIST Regional Root.
ProtocolMigration
The Protocol migration state of this port. When
operating in MSTP mode, set this field to true
to force the port to transmit MSTP BPDUs
without instance information.
ATTENTION
If this field is set to true and the port receives
an 802.1d BPDU, the port begins transmitting
802.1d BPDUs. If the port receives an
802.1w BPDU, it begins transmitting 802.1w
BPDUs.
AdminEdgeStatus
The administrative value of the Edge Port
parameter. A value of true indicates that this
port can be assumed to be an edge-port, and
a value of false indicates that this port can be
assumed to be a nonedge-port.
OperEdgeStatus
The operational value of the Edge Port
parameter. This value is initialized to the value
of AdminEdgeStatus and set to false when the
port receives a BPDU.
AdminP2P
The administrative point-to-point status of the
LAN segment attached to this port. A value
of 0 indicates that this port is always treated
as being connected to a point-to-point link. A
value of 1 indicates that this port is treated as
having a shared media connection. A value
of 2 indicates that this port is considered to
have a point-to-point link if it is an Aggregator
and all of its members are aggregatable, or
if the MAC entity is configured for full duplex
operation, either through auto-negotiation, or
by management means.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Configuring MSTP using Device Manager
179
Variable
Value
OperP2P
This field indicates the operational
point-to-point status of the LAN segment
attached to the port. It also indicates whether
a port is considered to have a point-to-point
connection. The value is determined by
management or by autodetection, as described
in the AdminP2P object.
HelloTime
The amount of time between the transmission
of Configuration BPDUs transmitted by
this node on the port. Measured in units of
hundredths of a second.
OperVersion
This indicates whether the Port is operationally
in the MSTP, RSTP, or STP-compatible mode;
that is, whether the port is transmitting MST
BPDUs, RST BPDUs, or Config/TCN BPDUs.
EffectivePortState
The effective operational state of the port for
CIST. This is set to true only when the port
is operationally up in the Interface level and
Protocol level for CIST. This is set to false for
all other times.
State
The current state of the port as defined by the
Common Spanning Tree Protocol.
ForcePortState
The current state of the port which can be
changed to either Disabled or Enabled for the
base Spanning Tree instance.
SelectedPortRole
Selected port role for the Spanning Tree
instance.
CurrentPortRole
The current port role for the Spanning Tree
instance.
Graphing CIST Port statistics
The CIST Port Stats tab shows CIST Port statistics.
Use the following procedure to open the CIST Port Stats tab for graphing.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From Device Manager menu bar, choose VLAN, Spanning
Tree, MSTP.
The MSTP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed.
2
Click the CIST Port tab.
The CIST Port tab appears.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
180
Configuring Spanning Tree Protocol using Device Manager
3
Select a port and click Graph to get the statistics for the CIST
Port.
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
ForwardTransitions
The number of times this port transitioned to
the Forwarding State.
RxMstBpduCount
The number of MST BPDUs received on this
port.
RxRstBpduCount
The number of RST BPDUs received on this
port.
RxConfigBpduCount
The number of Configuration BPDUs received
on this port.
RxTcnBpduCount
The number of TCN BPDUs received on this
port.
TxMstBpduCount
The number of MST BPDUs transmitted from
this port.
TxRstBpduCount
The number of RST BPDUs transmitted from
this port.
TxConfigBpduCount
The number of Configuration BPDUs
transmitted from this port.
TxTcnBpduCount
The number of TCN BPDUs transmitted from
this port.
InvalidMstBpduRxCount
The number of Invalid MST BPDUs received
on this port.
InvalidRstBpduRxCount
The number of Invalid RST BPDUs received
on this port.
InvalidConfigBpdu
RxCount
The number of Invalid Configuration BPDUs
received on this port.
InvalidTcnBpduRxCount
The number of Invalid TCN BPDUs received
on this port.
ProtocolMigrationCount
The number of times this port migrated
from one STP protocol version to another.
The relevant migration protocols are
STP-COMPATIBLE and RSTP/MSTP. A trap is
generated when the port migrates.
Viewing the MSTI Bridges tab
Use the following procedure to view the MSTI Bridges tab.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Configuring MSTP using Device Manager
181
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From Device Manager menu bar, choose VLAN, Spanning
Tree, MSTP.
The MSTP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed.
2
Click the MSTI Bridges tab.
The MSTI Bridges tab appears.
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
Instance
The Spanning Tree Instance to which the
information belongs.
RegionalRoot
The MSTI Regional Root Identifier value for
the Instance. This value is used as the MSTI
Regional Root Identifier parameter in all
Configuration Bridge PDUs originated by this
node.
Priority
The writable portion of the MSTI Bridge
Identifier comprising the first two octets. The
values that are set for Bridge Priority must be
in steps of 4096.
RootCost
The cost of the path to the MSTI Regional
Root as seen by this bridge.
RootPort
The number of the port which offers the lowest
path cost from this bridge to the MSTI Region
Root Bridge.
Enabled
Used to control whether the bridge instance is
enabled or disabled.
TimeSinceTopology
Change
The time (measured in hundredths of a
second) since the TcWhile Timer for any port
in this Bridge was non-zero for this Spanning
Tree instance.
TopChanges
The number of times that at least one non-zero
TcWhile Timer occurred on this Bridge for this
Spanning Tree instance.
NewRootCount
The number of times this Bridge has detected
a Root Bridge change for this Spanning
Tree instance. A Trap is generated on the
occurrence of this event.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
182
Configuring Spanning Tree Protocol using Device Manager
Variable
Value
InstanceUpCount
The number of times a new Spanning Tree
instance was created. A Trap is generated on
the occurrence of this event.
InstanceDownCount
The number of times a Spanning Tree instance
was deleted. A Trap is generated on the
occurrence of this event.
Inserting MSTI Bridges
Use the following procedure to insert a MSTI bridge.
Step
Action
1
From Device Manager menu bar, choose VLAN, Spanning
Tree, MSTP.
The MSTP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed.
2
Click the MSTI Bridges tab.
The MSTI Bridges tab appears.
3
In the MSTI Bridges tab, click the Insert button.
The Instance dialog box appears with the next available instance
shown.
4
Click Insert.
The next available instance appears in the MSTI Bridges tab.
--End--
Deleting MSTI Bridges
Use the following procedure to delete a MSTI bridge.
Step
Action
1
From Device Manager menu bar, choose VLAN, Spanning
Tree, MSTP.
The MSTP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed.
2
Click the MSTI Bridges tab.
The MSTI Bridges tab appears.
3
In the MSTI Bridges tab, click the Instance field for the MSTI
bridge that you want to delete.
4
Click Delete.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Configuring MSTP using Device Manager
183
The selected instance is deleted from the MSTI Bridges tab.
--End--
Associating a VLAN with the CIST or an MSTI instance
You can use Device Manager to associate a VLAN with the CIST or an
MSTI instance. Use the following procedure to associate a VLAN with the
CIST or an MSTI instance:
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From Device Manager menu bar, choose VLAN, VLANs.
The VLAN dialog box appears with the Basic tab displayed.
2
Click Insert.
The VLAN, Insert Basic dialog box appears.
3
In the MSTPInstance field, select the CIST or an MSTI instance
from the menu.
4
Populate the other fields as required.
5
Click Insert.
--End--
Modifying VLAN CIST or MSTI association
Use the following procedure to modify an existing VLAN association with
a CIST or MSTI.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From the VLAN Basic tab, double-click in the MSTPInstance
field.
The MSTPInstance menu appears.
2
Select the CIST option or one of the MSTI options and click
Apply.
This associates the VLAN with the option you selected.
--End--
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
184
Configuring Spanning Tree Protocol using Device Manager
Displaying the MSTI Port tab
Use the following procedure to view the MSTI Port tab.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From Device Manager menu bar, choose VLAN, Spanning
Tree, MSTP.
The MSTP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed.
2
Click the MSTI Port tab.
The MSTI Port tab appears.
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
Port
The port number.
BridgeInstance
The number of times a Spanning Tree instance
was deleted. A Trap is generated when this
event occurs.
State
The current state of the port as defined by the
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol. The state
of a port can be Forwarding or Discarding
(Blocking).
ForcePortState
The current state of the port which can be
changed to either Disabled or Enabled for the
specific Spanning Tree instance.
PathCost
The contribution of this port to the cost of paths
towards the MSTI Root which includes this
port.
Priority
The four most significant bits of the Port
Identifier for a given Spanning Tree instance.
This value can be modified independently for
each Spanning Tree instance supported by the
Bridge. The values set for Port Priority must be
in steps of 16.
DesignatedRoot
The unique Bridge Identifier of the bridge
recorded as the MSTI Regional Root in the
configuration BPDUs that are transmitted.
DesignatedBridge
The unique Bridge Identifier of the bridge
which this port considers to be the Designated
Bridge for the port segment.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Configuring MSTP using Device Manager
Variable
Value
DesignatedPort
The Port identifier of the port on the
Designated Bridge for this port segment.
DesignatedCost
The path cost of the Designated Port of the
segment connected to this port.
CurrentPortRole
The Current Port Role of the port for this
spanning tree instance.
EffectivePortState
The effective operational state of the port
for the specific instance. This is set to true
only when the port is operationally up in
the interface level and Protocol level for the
specific instance. This is set to false at all
other times.
185
Graphing MSTI Port Statistics
The MSTI Port tab can be used to graph MSTI port statistics.
Use the following procedure to open the MSTI Port tab for graphing.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From Device Manager menu bar, choose VLAN, Spanning
Tree, MSTP.
The MSTP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed.
2
Click the MSTI Port tab.
3
Select a port and click Graph to get the statistics for the MSTI
Port.
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
ForwardTransitions
The number of times this port transitioned to
the Forwarding State for the specific instance.
ReceivedBPDUs
The number of BPDUs received by this port for
this spanning tree instance.
TransmittedBPDUs
The number of Invalid BPDUs received on this
Port for this Spanning Tree instance.
InvalidBPDUsRcvd
The number of BPDUs transmitted on this port
for this Spanning Tree instance.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
186
Configuring Spanning Tree Protocol using Device Manager
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
187
.
Configuring ADAC using Device
Manager
This chapter contains the following procedures used in configuring
ADAC-related settings using Device Manager.
Configuring global ADAC settings
Use the following procedure to configure global ADAC settings.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From Device Manager menu bar, choose Edit , Chassis.
The Chassis dialog box appears.
2
Choose the ADAC tab.
The ADAC tab appears.
3
Select the AdminEnable field to enable ADAC.
4
Choose the Operating Mode.
5
In the NotificationControlEnable field, enable or disable trap
notifications.
6
Enter the Voice VLAN ID, Call Server port, and Uplink port.
7
Click Apply.
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
AdminEnable
Enables and disables ADAC.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
188
Configuring ADAC using Device Manager
Variable
Value
OperEnable
Indicates ADAC operational state: true is
enabled and false is disabled.
Note: If AdminEnable is True and
OperEnable is False, this indicates an error
condition such as missing Uplink and Call
Server ports.
OperatingMode
Sets the ADAC operation mode:
• untaggedFramesBasic: IP Phones send
untagged frames, and the Voice VLAN is
not created.
•
untaggedFramesAdvanced: IP Phones
send untagged frames, and the Voice
VLAN is created.
•
taggedFrames: IP Phones send tagged
frames.
NotificationControlEnable
Enables and disables ADAC trap
notifications.
VoiceVLAN
Sets the Voice VLAN ID.
CallServerPort
Sets the Call Server port.
UplinkPort
Sets the Uplink port.
MacAddrRangeControl
Provides two options for configuring the
MAC address range table:
•
clearTable: clears the MAC address
range table.
•
defaultTable: sets the MAC address
range table to its default values.
Configuring ADAC MAC address ranges using Device Manager
Use the following procedure to add MAC address ranges to the ADAC
MAC address range table.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From Device Manager menu bar, choose Edit, Chassis.
The Chassis dialog box appears, with the System tab displayed.
2
Choose the ADAC MAC Ranges tab.
The ADAC MAC Ranges tab appears.
3
Click Insert.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Configuring ADAC MAC address ranges using Device Manager
189
The Chassis, Insert ADAC MAC Ranges window appears.
4
In the MacAddrRangeLowEndIndex field, enter the low-end of
the MAC address range to add.
5
In the MacAddrRangeHighEndIndex field, enter the high-end of
the MAC address range to add.
6
Click Insert.
--End--
Deleting MAC address ranges using Device Manager
Use the following procedure to delete MAC address ranges from the ADAC
MAC address range table.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From Device Manager menu bar, choose Edit, Chassis.
The Chassis dialog box appears, with the System tab displayed.
2
Choose the ADAC MAC Ranges tab.
The ADAC MAC Ranges tab appears.
3
Select the desired range to delete.
4
Click Delete.
--End--
Configuring ADAC settings on a port
Use the following procedure to configure ADAC settings on a port.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
Select a port from Device Manager and then select Edit, Port
2
Click the ADAC tab.
The ADAC tab appears.
3
To enable ADAC for the port, select the AdminEnable check
box. To disable ADAC for the port, clear the AdminEnable
check box.
4
In the TaggedFramesPvid box, type a number between 0 and
4094, where 0 means "no change."
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
190
Configuring ADAC using Device Manager
5
Click on the TaggedFramesTagging setting required.
6
Select MacDetectionEnable or LldpDetectionEnable or select
them both to enable the detection methods on the port.
7
Click Apply.
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
AdminEnable
Enables or disables ADAC for the port.
OperEnable
Indicates ADAC operational state: true is
enabled and false is disabled.
Note: If OperEnable is False and AdminEnable
is True, then Auto-Detection/Auto-Configuration
is disabled. This can occur due to a condition
such as reaching the maximum number of
devices supported per port.
ConfigStatus
(Read only) Describes the ADAC status for the
port:
• configApplied means that the ADAC
configuration is applied to this port.
•
configNotApplied means that the ADAC
configuration is not applied to this port.
TaggedFramesPVID
Unique PVID between 1 and 4094. A value
of 0 indicates that Auto-Configuration cannot
change the PVID for the respective port.
TaggedFramesTagging
Choose
• tagAll to tag all frames
AdacPortType
•
tagPvidOnly to tag frames by the unique
PVID
•
untagPvidOnly to untag frames by the
unique PVID
•
noChange to accept frames without change
Describes how ADAC classifies the port:
•
telephony (when Autodetection is enabled
for the port)
•
•
•
callServer
uplink
none
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Configuring ADAC MAC address ranges using Device Manager
Variable
Value
MacDetectionEnable
True indicates that Autodetection of Nortel
IP Phones, based on MAC address, is
enabled on the interface. False indicates that
Autodetection of Nortel IP Phones, based on
MAC address, is disabled on the interface.
NOTE: MacDetectionEnable cannot be
set to false if no other supported detection
mechanism is enabled on the port.
LldpDetectionEnable
True indicates that Autodetection of Nortel
IP Phones, based on 802.1ab is enabled
on the interface. False indicates that
Autodetection of Nortel IP Phones, based on
802.1ab, is disabled on the interface. NOTE:
LldpDetectionEnable cannot be set to False
if no other supported detection mechanism is
enabled on the port.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
191
192
Configuring ADAC using Device Manager
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
193
.
Configuring LACP and VLACP using
Device Manager
Configuring LACP using Device Manager
This chapter contains procedures used to configure LACP using Device
Manager.
Configuring Link Aggregation Groups
Use the following procedure to configure Link Aggregation Groups.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From Device Manager menu, select VLAN, MLT/LACP.
The MLT_LACP dialog box appears with the LACP Global tab
displayed.
2
Select the LACP tab.
The LACP tab appears.
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
Index
The unique identifier allocated to this Aggregator
by the local System. This attribute identifies an
Aggregator instance among the subordinate
managed objects of the containing object. This
value is read-only.
MacAddress
The MAC address used by this bridge when it must
be referred to in a unique fashion.
AggregateOrIndividual
A read-only Boolean value indicating whether the
Aggregation Port can Aggregate (TRUE) or can
only operate as an Individual link (FALSE).
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
194
Configuring LACP and VLACP using Device Manager
Variable
Value
ActorLagID
The combined information of ActorSystemPriority,
ActorSystemID, and ActorOperKey in
ActorSystemPriority-ActorSystemID-ActorOperKey
format.
ActorSystemPriority
A 2-octet read-write value indicating the priority
value associated with the Actor’s System ID.
ActorSystemID
A 6-octet read-only MAC address value that
defines the value of the System ID for the System
that contains this Aggregation Port.
ActorOperKey
The current operational value of the Key for the
Aggregation Port. This is a 16-bit read-only value.
ActorAdminKey
The current administrative value of the Key for the
Aggregation Port. This is a 16-bit read-only value.
PartnerLagID
The combined information of PartnerSystemPriori
ty, PartnerSystemID, and PartnerOperKey in Part
nerSystemPriority-PartnerSystemID-PartnerOper
Key format.
PartnerSystemPriority
A 2-octet read-only value that indicates the priority
value associated with the Partner’s System ID.
PartnerSystemID
A 6-octet read-only MAC address value consisting
of the unique identifier for the current protocol
Partner of this Aggregator. A value of zero
indicates that no known Partner exists. If the
aggregation is manually configured, this System ID
value is assigned by the local System.
PartnerOperKey
The current operational value of the Key for the
Aggregator’s current protocol Partner. This is a
16-bit read-only value.
CollectorMaxDelay
The value of this 16-bit read-only attribute defines
the maximum delay, in tens of microseconds, that
can be imposed by the Frame Collector between
receiving a frame from an Aggregator Parser, and
either delivering the frame to its MAC Client or
discarding the frame.
Configuring LACP for ports
Use the following procedure to view or edit the LACP settings for ports:
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Configuring LACP using Device Manager
195
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
Select the ports that you want to edit.
2
From Device Manager main menu, choose Edit, Port.
The Port dialog box for multiple ports appears with the Interface
tab displayed.
3
Click the LACP tab.
The LACP tab appears.
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
AdminEnabled*
The current administrative setting for the port. A
value of true means the port is set to participate in
LACP. A value of false means the port is set to not
participate in LACP.
operEnabled
The current operational state for the port. A value
of true means the port is participating in LACP. A
value of false means the port is not participating in
LACP.
AggregateOrIndividual
A read-only Boolean value indicating whether the
Aggregator represents an Aggregate (true) or an
Individual link (false).
ActorSystemPriority
A 2-octet read-write value used to define the
priority value associated with the Actor’s System
ID.
ActorSystemID
A 6-octet read-only MAC address value that
defines the value of the System ID for the system
that contains this Port.
ActorAdminKey
The current administrative value of the Key for the
Aggregation Port.
ActorOperKey
The current operational value of the Key for the
Aggregation Port.
SelectedAggID
The identifier value of the Aggregator that this
Aggregation Port has currently selected. Zero
indicates that the Aggregation Port has not
selected an Aggregator, either because it is in
the process of detaching from an Aggregator or
because no suitable Aggregator exists for it to
select.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
196
Configuring LACP and VLACP using Device Manager
Variable
Value
AttachedAggID
The identifier value of the Aggregator that this
Aggregation Port is currently attached to. Zero
indicates that the Aggregation Port is not currently
attached to an Aggregator. This value is read-only.
ActorPort
The port number locally assigned to the
Aggregation Port. The port number is
communicated in LACPDUs as the Actor_Port.
This value is read-only
ActorPortPriority
The priority value assigned to this Aggregation
Port. This 16-bit value is read-write.
ActorAdminState*
A string of 8 bits, corresponding to the
administrative values of Actor_State as transmitted
by the Actor in LACPDUs.
ActorOperState
A string of 8 bits, corresponding to the current
operational values of Actor_State as transmitted by
the Actor in LACPDUs.
PartnerOperPort
The operational port number assigned by the port’s
protocol partner. This value is read-only.
*To set the LACP modes using dm, you must ensure that the LACP port
properties are set according to the desired mode, as follows:
• LACP mode Off = AdminEnabled field cleared (disabled)
•
•
LACP mode Passive = AdminEnabled field selected (enabled)
LACP mode Active = AdminEnabled field selected (enabled) and
ActorAdminState options lacpActive and aggregation selected
Configuring VLACP using Device Manager
This chapter contains procedures used to configure VLACP using Device
Manager.
Configuring global VLACP settings
VLACP is an extension to LACP used to detect end-to-end failure. Use the
following procedure to view or edit VLACP information for the switch:
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From Device Manager menu bar, choose VLAN, MLT/LACP
The MLT_LACP dialog box appears with the LACP Global tab
displayed.
2
Click VLACP Global.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Configuring VLACP using Device Manager
197
The VLACP Global tab appears.
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
Enable
Enables or disables VLACP on the switch.
MulticastMACAddress
Identifies a multicast MAC address used exclusively for
VLACPDUs. Default is 01:80:c2:00:11:00.
Configuring VLACP for ports
Use the following procedure to view or edit VLACP settings for ports.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
Select the ports you want to edit.
2
From Device Manager main menu, choose Edit, Port.
The Port dialog box appears with the Interface tab displayed.
3
Click the VLACP tab.
The VLACP tab appears.
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
AdminEnable
Enables or disables VLACP on a port. The default
value is False.
OperEnable
Indicates whether VLACP is operationally enabled
or disabled. This is a read-only field.
FastPeriodicTimer
Specifies the number of milliseconds between
periodic transmissions using short timeouts. Valid
values range from 400-20000 with a default of 500.
SlowPeriodicTimer
Specifies the number of milliseconds between
periodic transmissions using long timeouts. Valid
values range from 10000-30000 with a default of
30000.
Timeout
Specifies whether the timeout control value is a
short or long timeout.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
198
Configuring LACP and VLACP using Device Manager
Variable
Value
TimeoutScale
Sets a timeout scale for the port, where
timeout = (periodic time) * (timeout scale).
The range is 1-10. Default is 3.
Note: With VLACP, a short interval exists between
a port transmitting a VLACPDU and the partner
port receiving the same VLACPDU. However, if
the timeout-scale is set to 1, the port timeout value
does not take into account the normal travel time
of the VLACPDU. The port expects to receive a
VLACPDU at the same moment the partner port
sends it. Therefore, the delayed VLACPDU results
in the link being blocked, and then enabled again
when the packet arrives.
To prevent this scenario from happening, set the
timeout-scale to a value larger than 1.
EtherType
Specifies VLACP protocol identification. The ID
value is a 4-digit Hex number, with a default of
8103.
EtherMacAddress
The default value is 00:00:00:00:00:00 and it can
be configured with the MAC address of the switch
or stack to which this port is sending VLACPDUs.
It cannot be configured as a multicast MAC.
Note: VLACP has only one multicast MAC addr
ess, configured using the MulticastMACAddress
field in the VLACP Global tab, which is the Layer 2
destination address used for the VLACPDUs.
The port-specific EtherMACAddresss parameter
does not specify a multicast MAC address, but
instead specifies the MAC address of the switch or
stack to which this port is sending VLACPDUs.
You are not always required to configure
EtherMACAddresss. If not configured, the first
VLACP-enabled switch that receives the PDUs
from a unit assumes that it is the intended recipient
and processes the PDUs accordingly.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Configuring VLACP using Device Manager
Variable
199
Value
If you want an intermediate switch to drop VLACP
packets, configure the EtherMACAddresss field
with the desired destination MAC address. With
EtherMACAddresss configured, the intermediate
switches do not misinterpret the VLACP packets.
PortState
Identifies whether the VLACP port state is up or
down. This is a read-only field.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
200
Configuring LACP and VLACP using Device Manager
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
201
.
Configuring VLANs using Web-based
Management
The following sections detail how to create and manage a VLAN using
Web-based Management. VLAN creation and management is performed
in the VLAN Configuration screen.
This chapter contains the following procedures:
Creating a Port-based VLAN
Use the following procedure to create a port-based VLAN.
The new VLAN is displayed in the VLAN Configuration page. When a new
VLAN has been created, it must be modified to add ports.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
Select Applications, VLAN, VLAN Configuration.
The VLAN Configuration page appears.
2
In the VLAN Creation section, select Port.
3
Click Create VLAN.
The Applications, VLAN, VLAN Configuration: Port Based
screen appears.
4
On the Port Based Setting screen, in the VLAN field, type a
number for the VLAN between 2 and 4094.
5
Type a name for the VLAN in the VLAN Name field.
The VLAN Name field is optional.
6
Select a group number from the Spanning Tree Group list.
7
Click Submit to create the VLAN.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
202
Configuring VLANs using Web-based Management
If you do not want to create the VLAN, click Back to return to the
VLAN Configuration page.
--End--
Creating a Protocol-based VLAN
Use the following procedure to create a protocol-based VLAN.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
Select Applications, VLAN, VLAN Configuration.
The VLAN Configuration page appears.
2
In the VLAN Creation section, select Protocol.
3
Click Create VLAN.
4
In the Protocol Based Settings screen, fill in the required
information to create the VLAN.
5
Click Submit.
--End--
The new VLAN is displayed in the VLAN Configuration page.
When a new VLAN is created, it must be modified to add ports. .
Table 10 " Standard protocol-based VLANS and PID types" (page
203) describes the standard protocol-based VLAN and PID types
supported by the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series.
Table 11 " Predefined Protocol Identifiers" (page 205) describes reserved
PIDs that are not available in user-defined PIDs.
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
VLAN
The unique number between 2 and 4094 that
identifies the VLAN.
VLAN Name
The name of the VLAN.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Creating a Protocol-based VLAN
203
Variable
Value
Protocol
The protocol that this VLAN will use. Consult
Table 10 " Standard protocol-based VLANS
and PID types" (page 203) for an explanation
of these protocols.
User Defined Protocol
If ProtocolUser Defined was selected from
the list, specify the protocol identifier for the
VLAN.
ATTENTION
Any frames that match the specified PID in
any of the following ways are assigned to
that user-defined VLAN:
•
•
•
The ethertype for Ethernet type 2 frames
The PID in Ethernet SNAP frames
The DSAP or SSAP value in Ethernet 802.2
frames
For a list of reserved PIDs that are unavailable
for user-defined PIDs, see Table 11 "
Predefined Protocol Identifiers" (page 205).
Job aid
Table 10
Standard protocol-based VLANS and PID types
PID Name
Encapsulation
PID Value (Hex)
VLAN Type
IP Ether2
Ethernet type 2
0800, 0806
Standard IP on
Ethernet Type 2
frames
IPX 802.3
Ethernet 802.3
FFFF
Novell IPX on
Ethernet 802.3
frames
IPX 802.2
Ethernet 802.2
E0 E0
Novell IPX on
Ethernet 802.2
frames
IPX Snap
Ethernet Snap
8137, 8138
Novell IPX on
Ethernet SNAP
frames
IPX Ethernet II
Ethernet type 2
8137, 8138
Novell IPX on
Ethernet Type 2
frames
DEC Lat
Ethernet type 2
6004
DEC LAT protocol
Sna 802.2
Ethernet 802.2
04**, **04
IBM SNA on IEEE
802.2 frames
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
204
Configuring VLANs using Web-based Management
Table 10
Standard protocol-based VLANS and PID types (cont’d.)
PID Name
Encapsulation
PID Value (Hex)
VLAN Type
Sna Ethernet II
Ethernet type 2
80D5
IBM SNA on Ethernet
Type 2 frames
NetBios
Ethernet type 2
F0**, **F0
NetBIOS protocol
XNS
Ethernet type 2
0600, 0807
Xerox XNS
Vines
Ethernet type 2
0BAD
Banyan VINES
IPv6
Ethernet type 2
86DD
IP version 6
RARP
Ethernet type 2
8035
Reverse Address
Resolution Protocol
(RARP):
RARP is a protocol
used by some old
diskless devices to
obtain IP addresses
by providing the MAC
layer address. When
you create a VLAN
based on RARP, you
can limit the RARP
broadcasts to the
ports that lead to the
RARP server.
User-Defined
Ethernet type 2,
Ethernet 802.2,
or Ethernet Snap
User-defined 16
bit value
If you select User
Defined from the
Protocol list, specify
the protocol identifier
for the VLAN.
ATTENTION
Any frames that
match the specified
PID, in any of the
following ways are
assigned to that
user defined VLAN:
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Creating a Protocol-based VLAN
205
Table 10
Standard protocol-based VLANS and PID types (cont’d.)
PID Name
Encapsulation
PID Value (Hex)
VLAN Type
•
The ethertype for
Ethernet type 2
frames
•
The PID in
Ethernet SNAP
frames
•
The DSAP or
SSAP value in
Ethernet 802.2
frames.
For a list of
rereserved PIDs
that are unavailable
for user-defined
PIDs, see Table 11 "
Predefined Protocol
Identifiers" (page
205).
Table 11
Predefined Protocol Identifiers
PID Name
Encapsulation
PID Value (Hex)
VLAN Type
IPX 802.3
Ethernet 802.3
FF FF
Novell IPX on
Ethernet 802.3
frames
IPX 802.2
Ethernet 802.2
E0 E0
Novell IPX on
Ethernet 802.2
frames
IPX Snap
Ethernet Snap
8137, 8138
Novell IPX on
Ethernet SNAP
frames
IP Ether2
Ethernet type 2
0800, 0806
Standard IP on
Ethernet Type 2
frames
IPX Ethernet II
Ethernet type 2
8137, 8138
Novell IPX on
Ethernet Type 2
frames
AplTk Ether2
Snap
Ethernet type 2
or Ethernet Snap
809B, 80F3
AppleTalk on
Ethernet Type 2 and
Ethernet Snap frames
Declat Ether2
Ethernet type 2
6004
DEC LAT protocol
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
206
Configuring VLANs using Web-based Management
Table 11
Predefined Protocol Identifiers (cont’d.)
PID Name
Encapsulation
PID Value (Hex)
VLAN Type
Sna Ether2
Ethernet type 2
80D5
IBM SNA on Ethernet
Type 2 frames
NetBios 802.2
Ethernet type 2
F0**, **F0
NetBIOS protocol
Xns Ether2
Ethernet type 2
0600, 0807
Xerox XNS
Vines Ether2
Ethernet type 2
0BAD
Banyan VINES
Ipv6 Ether2
Ethernet type 2
86DD
IP version 6
User-Defined
Ethernet type 2,
Ethernet 802.2,
or Ethernet Snap
User-defined 16
bit value
User-defined
protocol-based VLAN
RARP
Ethernet type 2
8035
Reverse Address
Resolution Protocol
(RARP)
Modifying a Port-based VLAN
Use the following procedure to modify an existing port-based VLAN.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From the menu, select Applications, VLAN, VLAN
Configuration.
The VLAN Configuration page appears.
2
In the VLAN Table section, select the VLAN to be modified by
clicking the Modify icon in the appropriate VLAN row.
3
The VLAN Configuration: Port Based screen appears. On this
screen, modify port membership for the VLAN by selecting check
boxes to add a port to the VLAN or clearing check boxes to
remove a port.
4
Click Submit.
The modified VLAN is now displayed in the VLAN Table section
of the VLAN Configuration screen.
--End--
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Modifying a Protocol-based VLAN
207
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
VLAN
The number assigned to the VLAN when it was
created. This field is non-editable.
VLAN Name
The name assigned to the VLAN when it was
created.
Learning Constraint
All Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
switches have a learning constraint of IVL. This
means that the VLAN uses a filtering database
that is independent of all other VLANs.
Unit/Port Membership
Select the check boxes of stand-alone or
stacked unit ports to associate them with the
VLAN. If the port is already a member, clear
the check box to remove it as a member of the
VLAN.
Modifying a Protocol-based VLAN
Use the following procedure to modify a protocol-based VLAN.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From the menu, select Applications, VLAN, VLAN
Configuration.
The VLAN Configuration page appears.
2
In the VLAN Table section, select the VLAN to be modified by
clicking the Modify icon in the appropriate VLAN row.
3
The VLAN Configuration: Protocol Based screen appears. On
this screen, modify port membership for the VLAN by selecting
check boxes to add a port to the VLAN or clearing check boxes
to remove a port.
4
Click Submit.
The modified VLAN is now displayed in the VLAN Table section
of the VLAN Configuration screen.
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
VLAN
The number assigned to the VLAN when it was
created. This field is non-editable.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
208
Configuring VLANs using Web-based Management
Variable
Value
VLAN Name
The name assigned to the VLAN when it was
created.
Protocol
The protocol assigned to the VLAN when it was
created.
User Defined Protocol
The user-defined protocol assigned to the VLAN
during configuration.
Learning Constraint
All Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
switches have a learning constraint of IVL. This
means that the VLAN uses a filtering database
that is independent of all other VLANs.
Unit/Port Membership
Select the check boxes of stand-alone or stacked
unit ports to associate them with the VLAN. If the
port is already a member, clear the check box to
remove it as a member of the VLAN.
Selecting a Management VLAN
Any VLAN can be selected to perform as the management VLAN. VLAN
1 is the default management VLAN for the switch. To set this field, the
VLAN State field value must be Active.
Use the following procedure to select a VLAN as the management VLAN.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From the main menu, choose Applications, VLAN, VLAN
Configuration.
The VLAN Configuration page appears.
2
In the VLAN Setting section, choose the VLAN to assign as your
management VLAN.
3
Click Submit.
--End--
Deleting a VLAN configuration
Use the following procedure to delete a VLAN configuration.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Flushing the MAC address table using Web-based management
209
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From the main menu, choose Applications, VLAN, VLAN
Configuration.
The VLAN Configuration page appears.
2
In the VLAN Table section, click the Delete icon for the entry
you want to delete.
3
A dialog box appears asking for confirmation of the delete action.
Do one of the following:
•
•
Click Yes to delete the VLAN configuration.
Click Cancel to return to the VLAN Configuration page
without making changes.
--End--
Accessing VLAN Configuration Control
Use the following procedure to access VLAN Configuration Control from
Web-based Management.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From the Access menu, select Applications.
2
From the Applications menu, select VLAN.
3
Select VLAN Configuration. The Applications, VLAN, VLAN
Configuration page appears.
4
Select one of the options from the VLAN ConfigControl list.
5
Click Submit.
--End--
Flushing the MAC address table using Web-based management
You can flush the MAC address table of dynamically-learned MAC
addresses.
Perform this procedure to flush MAC addresses from the MAC address
table.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
210
Configuring VLANs using Web-based Management
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
Browse to Configuration, MAC Address Table.
The MAC Address Table configuration dialog box appears.
2
Select the interface from the MAC Flush list box.
3
Type the MAC address, the VLAN or trunk number, or the port
number or range in Mac Flush field.
4
Click Submit.
--End--
Variable definitions
Use the information in the following table to complete this procedure.
Variable
Value
MAC Flush
The type of addresses to flush from the MAC
address table. Choose from the following
options.
• Address, enter the MAC address to flush
•
•
•
•
VLAN, enter the VLAN number
Port, enter the port number or the port range
Trunk, enter the trunk number
All
Job aid: How to enter port ranges for the Flush Port command
These examples illustrate how to enter port ranges for the Flush Port
command.
Flushing out ports 1 and 2 on a stand-alone unit example
Flush Port 1,2
Flushing out ports 1–10 on unit 2 and 1–7 on unit 3 of a stack example
Flush Port 2/1-10,3/1-7
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
211
.
Configuring Multi-Link Trunking using
Web-based Management
This chapter contains procedures used to create and manage Multi Link
Trunks using Web-based Management.
Creating a Multi Link trunk
Use the following procedure to create a MLT.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From the menu, select Applications, Multi-Link Trunk, Group.
The Multi-Link Trunk Group page appears .
2
In the fields provided, fill in the information for the MLT to be
created.
3
Click Submit.
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
Trunk Members
Type the port numbers to associate with the
corresponding trunk.
ATTENTION
Between two and four switch ports can be
configured together as members of a trunk
to a maximum of 8 trunks. Switch ports can
only be assigned to be a member of a single
trunk.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
212
Configuring Multi-Link Trunking using Web-based Management
Variable
Value
STP
Choose the parameter that allows the specified
trunk to participate in the spanning tree group.
This setting overrides those of the individual
trunk members. Selecting Fast shortens the
state transition timer by two seconds. For more
information, see “Configuring Spanning Tree
Group Participation” (page 212).
Trunk Mode
Release 5.2 supports Basic and Advanced
mode.
Trunk Name
Type a character string to create a unique
name to identify the trunk, for example,
Trunk1.
The name, if chosen carefully, can provide
meaningful information to you. For example,
S1:T1 to FS2 indicates that Trunk1, in Switch1
connects to File Server 2.
Trunk Status
Choose to enable or disable any of the existing
Multi-Link trunks.
ATTENTION
When a trunk is not active (Trunk Status field
set to Disabled), configuration changes do
not take effect until the Trunk Status field is
set to Enabled.
Configuring Spanning Tree Group Participation
After a Multi Link trunk has been established, MLT participation in a
Spanning Tree Group can be configured. To configure STG participation,
the MLT must have a Trunk Status of Enabled.
Use the following procedure to configure Spanning Tree Group
participation.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From the menu, select Applications, Multi Link Trunk, Group.
The Multi Link Trunk Group page appears.
2
Click the button in the STP column for the row that represents
the Multi Link trunk that is to be configured.
The Multi Link Trunk Spanning Tree Settings page appears.
3
Set the STP Learning list to reflect the desired learning mode.
The three options available are:
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Monitoring an MLT
•
•
•
4
213
Normal: Sets the learning mode to normal.
Fast: Sets the learning mode to fast.
Disable: Disables learning.
Click Submit.
--End--
Monitoring an MLT
Use the following procedure to monitor the bandwidth usage of the MLT.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From the menu, select Applications, Multi-Link Trunk,
Utilization. The Utilization page appears.
2
In the Multi-Link Trunk Utilization Selection section, select the
trunk to be monitored in the Trunk list and the type of traffic to
be monitored in the Traffic Type list.
3
Click Submit. MLT utilization statistics appear on the Multi-Link
Trunk Utilization Table section.
--End--
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
214
Configuring Multi-Link Trunking using Web-based Management
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
215
.
Configuring Spanning Tree Protocol
using Web-based Management
Setting the STP mode using Web-based Management
Use the following procedure to set the STP operational mode using
Web-based Management.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From the menu, select Applications, Spanning Tree,
Operational Mode.
The Operational Mode page appears.
2
Select the Spanning Tree Administrative Mode from the list.
The available options are
•
•
•
3
STP Compatible
RSTP
MSTP
Click Submit.
A warning appears reminding you that a switch reset is required
for the change to take effect.
4
Click OK.
5
To reset the switch, choose Administration, Reset.
--End--
Creating and Managing STGs using Web-based Management
Use Web-based Management screens described in this section to create
and manage Spanning Tree Groups.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
216
Configuring Spanning Tree Protocol using Web-based Management
This chapter contains the following procedures used to create and manage
STGs using Web-based Management:
Creating a Spanning Tree Group
Use the following procedure to create a Spanning Tree Group.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From the menu, select Applications, Spanning Tree, Group
Configuration.
The Group Configuration page appears.
2
In the STG Group Creation section, enter the information to
create the new Spanning Tree Group.
3
Click Submit.
The new Spanning Tree Group is created and displayed in the
STG Group Table section of the Group Configuration page.
The new Spanning Tree Group is disabled until you modify it by
clicking the Modify button on the STG Group Table section.
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
STP Group Index
Choose the group number to be created.
Bridge Priority
Select the desired priority from the list.
Hello Time
Enter the desired hello time for this STG in
seconds; the range is 1 to 10.
Max. Age time
Enter the desired maximum age time for this
STG in seconds; the range is 6 to 40.
Forward Delay Time
Enter the desired forward delay time for this
STG in seconds; the range is 4 to 30.
Tagged BPDU on Tagged Port Set the frames as tagged (Yes) or untagged
(No) on tagged ports.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Creating and Managing STGs using Web-based Management
Variable
Value
VID used for Tagged BPDU
Enter the VLAN ID for tagged BPDUs for the
specified STG.
217
ATTENTION
The default VIDs are 4001 through 4008 for
STGs 1 through 8, respectively.
STP Multicast Address
Enter the STP multicast MAC address.
Modifying a Spanning Tree Group
Use the following procedure to modify an existing Spanning Tree Group.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From the menu, select Applications, Spanning Tree, Group
Configuration.
The Group Configuration page appears.
2
In the STG Group Table section, click the Modify button for the
STG to be modified.
The Group Configuration page appears and allows the Spanning
Tree Group information to be edited.
3
Use the STG Group State field to enable or disable the
selected Spanning Tree Group.
4
Make any additional changes to the Spanning Tree Group using
the fields provided.
5
Click Submit.
--End--
Deleting a Spanning Tree Group
Use the following procedure to delete a Spanning Tree Group.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From the menu, select Applications, Spanning Tree, Group
Configuration.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
218
Configuring Spanning Tree Protocol using Web-based Management
The Group Configuration page appears.
2
In the STG Group Table section, click the Delete button for the
STG to be deleted. (STG 1 can never be deleted.)
A message appears asking for confirmation of the deletion.
3
Click Yes.
--End--
Associating an STG with VLAN Membership
Use the following procedure to modify the association of a VLAN with an
STG.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From the menu, select Applications, Spanning Tree, VLAN
Membership.
The VLAN Membership page appears.
2
To add or delete a VLAN, perform the following procedure.
a To add a VLAN to an STG:
•
Click the Modify button that appears in the Add VLAN
column of the STG to be modified.
The VLAN Membership modification page appears.
•
In the Add VLAN Membership field, type the numbers of
the VLANs to be added, separated by spaces.
•
Click Submit.
b To remove a VLAN from an STG:
•
Click the Modify button that appears in the Remove
VLAN column of the STG to be modified.
The VLAN Membership deletion page appears.
•
In the Remove VLAN Membership field, type the
numbers of the VLANs to be removed, separated by
spaces.
•
Click Submit.
--End--
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Creating and Managing STGs using Web-based Management
219
Configuring Spanning Tree ports
Use the following procedure to configure ports for participation in a
Spanning Tree Group.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From the menu, select Applications, Spanning Tree, Port
Configuration .
The Port Configuration page appear.
2
From the STG Group section Group list, select the STG to
configure.
3
Immediately under the STG Group section, click Submit.
4
With the desired STG selected, use the fields in the Spanning
Tree - Port Setting section to denote which ports will participate
in the STG.
5
Immediately under the Spanning Tree -- Port Setting section,
click Submit.
The Spanning Tree -- Port Setting section does not list all ports
on a switch at one time. Click the links that appear at the bottom
of the page to view the designated ports.
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
Port
The port number.
Trunk
The trunk that corresponds to the switch ports
specified as MLT members.
Tagging
Display whether the port is a tagged or an
untagged port.
Participation
This list is used to select the STG participation
for the port. The options are:
• Normal Learning
•
•
Fast Learning
Disabled
ATTENTION
When an individual port is a trunk member,
changing this setting for one of the trunk
members changes the setting for all
members of that trunk. Consider the effect
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
220
Configuring Spanning Tree Protocol using Web-based Management
Variable
Value
that changing this value will have on the
network topology before making changes.
The default setting is Normal Learning.
Priority (hex)
The bridge spanning tree parameter that
prioritizes the lowest port path cost to the root.
When one or more ports have the same path
cost, STP selects the path with the highest
priority (lowest numerical value).
Path Cost
The bridge spanning tree parameter that
determines the lowest path cost to the root.
State
The current state of the port as defined by
application of the Spanning Tree Protocol.
This state controls what action a port takes on
reception of a frame.
ATTENTION
If the bridge has detected a port that is
malfunctioning, it will place that port into the
broken state. For ports which are disabled,
this object will have a value of disabled.
Modifying STG Bridge Information
Use the following procedure to modify the Spanning Tree Group Bridge
information.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From the menu, select Applications, Spanning Tree, Bridge
Information .
The Bridge Information page appears.
2
From the Group list in the STG Group section, select the STG
to modify.
3
Immediately underneath the STG Group section, click the
Submit button.
4
In the fields provided, edit the information pertaining to the
selected STG.
5
Click Submit.
--End--
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Creating and Managing STGs using Web-based Management
221
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
Bridge Priority
Select the priority value of the bridge ID in
hexadecimal notation, which is the most
significant byte of the bridge ID. The Spanning
Tree Algorithm uses this parameter to
determine the root bridge (or designated
bridge). For example, the bridge with the
lowest bridge ID becomes the root bridge, with
Bridge Priority values compared first, followed
by the hardware addresses.
The default setting is 8000.
Designated Root
The bridge ID of the root bridge, as determined
by the Spanning Tree Algorithm.
Root Port
The port number of the port which offers the
lowest cost past from this bridge to the root
bridge.
Root Path Cost
The cost of the path to the root as seen from
this bridge.
Hello Time
The actual Hello Interval, the amount of time
between transmissions of configuration Bridge
Protocol Data Units (BPDUs) that the root
bridge is currently using.
ATTENTION
Bridges participating in the spanning tree
network use the root bridge’s Hello Interval
parameter value. See also Bridge Hello
Time.
Maximum Age Time
The Maximum Age Time parameter value
that the root bridge is currently using. This
value specifies the maximum age that a Hello
message can attain before it is discarded.
ATTENTION
The root bridge’s Maximum Age Time
parameter value becomes the actual
Maximum Age Time parameter value for all
bridges participating in the spanning tree
network. See also Bridge Maximum Age
Time.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
222
Configuring Spanning Tree Protocol using Web-based Management
Variable
Value
Forward Delay
The Forward Delay parameter value that
the root bridge is currently using. This value
specifies the amount of time that the bridge
ports remain in the Listening and Learning
states before entering the Forwarding state.
ATTENTION
The root bridge’s Forward Delay parameter
value becomes the actual Forward Delay
parameter value for all bridges participating
in the spanning tree network. See also
Bridge Forward Delay.
Bridge Hello Time
The Hello Interval (the amount of time
between transmissions of BPDUs) specified by
management for this bridge. This parameter
takes effect only when this bridge becomes the
root bridge.
ATTENTION
Although you can set the Hello Interval for a
bridge using bridge management software,
after the spanning tree computation process
is complete, all bridges participating in the
spanning tree network use the root bridge
Hello Interval parameter value. If any bridge
becomes the root bridge, its Hello Interval
parameter value becomes the Actual Hello
Interval parameter value for all bridges
participating in the spanning tree network.
The default is 2 seconds.
Bridge Maximum Age Time
The Maximum Age Time parameter value that
the root bridge uses. This value specifies the
maximum age that a Hello message can attain
before being discarded.
ATTENTION
The root bridge Maximum Age Time
parameter value becomes the actual
Maximum Age Time parameter value for all
bridges participating in the spanning tree
network.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Configuring RSTP using Web-based management
Variable
Value
Bridge Forward Delay
The Forward Delay parameter value that the
root bridge uses. This value specifies the
amount of time that the bridge ports remain
in the Listening and Learning states before
entering the Forwarding state.
223
ATTENTION
The root bridge Forward Delay parameter
value becomes the actual Forward Delay
parameter value for all bridges participating
in the spanning tree network.
Tagged BPDU on Tagged Port This parameter determines whether tagged or
untagged BPDUs are sent from a tagged port.
VID used for Tagged BPDU
This parameter determines the VLAN ID sent
with the tagged BPDUs for the specified STG.
STP Multicast Address
The STP multicast address to be used.
Configuring RSTP using Web-based management
The Rapid Spanning Tree protocol (RSTP or IEEE 802.1w) reduces the
recovery time after a network breakdown. It also maintains a backward
compatibility with the IEEE 802.1d which was the Spanning Tree
implementation prior to RSTP. In certain configurations the recovery time
of RSTP can be reduced to less than 1 second.
RSTP also reduces the amount of flooding in the network by enhancing
the way the Topology Change Notification (TCN) packet is generated.
This chapter contains procedures used to configure RSTP using
Web-based management.
Configuring RSTP bridge settings
Use the following procedure to view and configure the existing Spanning
Tree (RSTP) bridge switch settings.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From the main menu, choose Applications, Spanning Tree,
Bridge Configuration.
The Spanning Tree (RSTP) - Bridge Configuration page appears.
--End--
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
224
Configuring Spanning Tree Protocol using Web-based Management
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
STP Priority
The value of the writable portion of the Bridge ID. That is,
the first two octets of the (8 octet long) Bridge ID. The other
(last) 6 octets of the Bridge ID are given by the value of
dot1dBaseBridgeAddress. On bridges supporting IEEE 802.1t
or IEEE 802.1w permissible values are 0-61440, in steps of
4096.
Designated
Root
The bridge identifier of the root of the spanning tree as
determined by the Spanning Tree Protocol as executed by this
node. This value is used as the Root Identifier parameter in all
Configuration Bridge PDUs originated by this node.
Stp Root Cost
The cost of the path to the root as seen from this bridge.
Stp Root Port
The port number of the port which offers the lowest cost path
from this bridge to the root bridge.
Stp Version
Set version for the bridge: rstp/stp-compatible.
Bridge Max
Age
The value that all bridges use for MaxAge when this bridge
acts as the root.
ATTENTION
802.1D-1990 specifies that the range is related to the value
of BridgeHelloTime. The granularity of this timer is specified
by 802.1D-1990 to be 1 second. A badValue error can be
returned if the value set is not a whole number.
Bridge Hello
Time
The value that all bridges use for HelloTime when this bridge
acts as the root.
ATTENTION
The granularity of this timer is specified by 802.1D-1990 to
be 1 second. A badValue error can be returned if the value
set is not a whole number.
Bridge Forwar
d Delay Time
The value that all bridges use for ForwardDelay when this
bridge acts as the root.
ATTENTION
802.1D-1990 specifies that the range is related to the value
of BridgeHelloTime. The granularity of this timer is specified
by 802.1D-1990 to be 1 second. A badValue error can be
returned if the value set is not a whole number.
Tx Hold Count
The value used by the Port Transmit state machine to limit the
maximum transmission rate.
PathCost
Default Type
The version of the Spanning Tree default Path Costs that are
used by this Bridge.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Configuring RSTP using Web-based management
225
Configuring RSTP port settings
Use the following procedure to open the Spanning Tree (RSTP) - Port
Configuration page.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From the main menu, choose Applications, Spanning Tree,
Port Configuration.
The Spanning Tree (RSTP) - Port Configuration page appears.
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
Port
The port number of the currently displayed unit.
STP Participatio
n
Enables or disables STP participation on the port. The
default setting is Disabled.
Priority (hex)
The bridge spanning tree parameter that prioritizes the lowest
port path cost to the root. When one or more ports have the
same path cost, STP selects the path with the highest priority
(lowest numerical value).
Path Cost
The bridge spanning tree parameter that determines the
lowest path cost to the root.
Admin Edge
Status
The administrative value of the Edge Port parameter. A value
of True indicates that this port is assumed to be an edge-port,
and a value of False indicates that this port is assumed to be
a nonedge-port.
An Edge Port goes directly to Forwarding state without delay.
Edge ports do not receive any Topology Change notifications
and cannot influence the Spanning Tree Algorithm in
detecting network loops. This is a particular port setting, not
a learning mode.
Oper Edge
Status
Can be True or False. This is set to False when AdminEdge
is set to True and the port receives BPDUs (any kind) or
when AdminEdge is set to False.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
226
Configuring Spanning Tree Protocol using Web-based Management
Variable
Value
Admin P2P
Status
The administrative point-to-point status of the LAN segment
attached to this port. A value of 0 indicates that this port is
always treated as being connected to a point-to-point link.
A value of 1 indicates that this port is treated as having a
shared media connection. A value of 2 indicates that this
port is considered to have a point-to-point link if it is an
Aggregator and all of its members are aggregatable, or if
the MAC entity is configured for full duplex operation, either
through auto-negotiation, or by management means.
Oper P2P
Status
This field indicates the operational point-to-point status of the
LAN segment attached to the port. It also indicates whether
a port is considered to have a point-to-point connection. The
value is determined by management or by autodetection, as
described in the AdminP2P object.
Oper Protocol
Version
Display the operational mode of the port.
Role
The current role of the port as defined by Rapid Spanning
Tree Protocol. The role of a port can be Root, Designated,
Alternate, or Backup.
State
The current state of the port as defined by application of the
Spanning Tree Protocol. This state controls what action a
port takes on reception of a frame.
If the bridge detects a port that is malfunctioning, the port is
placed into the disabled state.
Protocol
Migration
Set this field to True (allow protocol migration) or False
(prevent protocol migration).
Configuring MSTP using Web-based management
This section contains procedures used to configure MSTP using
Web-based Management.
Creating MSTI instances
Use the following procedure to create MSTI instances.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From the main menu, choose Applications, Spanning Tree,
Bridge Configuration.
The MSTP Bridge Configuration page appears.
2
To create an MSTI, choose an MSTI from the Spanning Tree MSTI Bridge Creation list, and click Submit.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Configuring MSTP using Web-based management
227
The new MSTI instance appears in the Spanning Tree - MSTI
Bridge Configuration section.
--End--
Variable Definitions
Section
Variabl
e
Spanning Tree
- CIST Bridge
Configuration
Value
Display a configuration page for the CIST.
Bridge
Regiona
l Root
Port and the MAC address of the root switch.
Bridge
Priority
The priority value of the bridge ID in hexadecimal
notation, which is the most significant byte of the
bridge ID.
Root
Cost
The cost of the path to the root as seen from this
bridge.
Root
Port
The port number of the port which offers the
lowest path cost from this bridge to the root
bridge.
Display a configuration page for the MSTI.
Spanning Tree
- MSTI Bridge
Configuration
Delete the MSTI.
MSTI
Display the index of MSTP.
Bridge
Regiona
l Root
Display the unique Bridge Identifier of the bridge.
Bridge
Priority
Type the priority value of the bridge ID in
hexadecimal notation, which is the most
significant byte of the bridge ID.
Root
Cost
The cost of the path to the root as seen from this
bridge.
Root
Port
The port number of the port which offers the
lowest path cost from this bridge to the root
bridge.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
228
Configuring Spanning Tree Protocol using Web-based Management
Section
Spanning Tree
- MSTI Bridge
Creation
Variabl
e
Value
State
Specify whether the bridge instance is enabled or
disabled.
MSTI
Display the index of MSTP. To add an MSTI,
choose an MSTI identifier from the list and click
submit.
Configuring MSTI bridge settings
Use the following procedure to configure the MSTI bridge settings on the
switch.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From the MSTP Bridge Configuration page, under Spanning
Tree - MSTI Bridge Configuration, choose the MSTI Bridge
Configuration Action icon.
The MSTI Bridge Configuration page appears.
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
MSTI
The Multiple Spanning Tree instance.
Bridge Priority
The writable portion of the MSTI bridge identifier
comprising the first two octets.
Bridge Regional Root
Indicates the MSTI regional root identifier value for
the MSTI. All configuration bridge PDUs originated by
this node use this value as the MSTI Regional Root
Identifier parameter.
Root Cost
The cost of the path to the MSTI regional root as seen
by this bridge.
Root Port
The port number of the port that offers the lowest path
cost from this bridge to the MSTI region root bridge.
State
Used to control whether the bridge instance is enabled
or disabled.
Configuring CIST bridge settings
Use the following procedure to configure CIST settings on the switch.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Configuring MSTP using Web-based management
229
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From the MSTP Bridge Configuration page, under Spanning
Tree - CIST Bridge Configuration, choose the Modify icon.
The CIST Bridge Configuration page appears.
--End--
Variable Definitions
Section
Variable
Value
Spanning Tree
- CIST Bridge
Configuration
Bridge
Priority
The value of the writable portion of the bridge
identifier comprising the first two octets.
Stp Version
Sets the STP version in which the CIST bridge
is participating.
Bridge Max
Age
The value in seconds that all bridges use for
MaxAge when this bridge acts as the root. The
range is 6 to 40.
Bridge
Forward
Delay Time
The value in seconds that all bridges use for
ForwardDelay when this bridge acts as the
root. IEEE 802.1D specifies that the range for
this parameter is related to the value of Bridge
Max Age. The range is 4 to 30.
Tx Hold
Count
The value used by the Port Transmit state
machine to limit the maximum transmission
rate.
PathCost
Default
Type
The version of the spanning tree default path
costs that this bridge uses. A 16-bit value
uses the 16-bit default path costs from IEEE
Standard 802.1D-1998. A 32-bit value uses the
32-bit default path costs from IEEE Standard
802.1t.
Max Hop
Count
The maximum hop count value in 1/100
seconds. The value must be a multiple of 100.
The range is 600 to 4000.
Max Mst
Instance
Number
The highest possible value for the MSTI ID in
this mode.
Number
of MSTI
Supported
The number of MSTI supported in this mode.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
230
Configuring Spanning Tree Protocol using Web-based Management
Section
Variable
Value
Spanning
Tree - Region
Configuration
Config Id
Selector
The MSTP config ID selector. The default
value is 0.
Region
Name
The MSTP region name. The default value is
the bridge MAC address.
Region
Version
The MSTP region version. The default value is
0.
Config
Digest
The configuration digest value for this region.
Adding VLANs to the MSTI
Use the following procedure to add a VLAN to an MSTI.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From the main menu, choose Applications, Spanning Tree,
Bridge VLAN.
The MSTP VLAN page appears.
The table displays the current VLAN membership for the MSTIs.
2
To add a VLAN:
a Click the modification icon in the Add VLAN column for the
CIST or MSTI.
The MSTP VLAN Membership (Add) page appears.
b Enter the ID numbers of the VLANs you want to add to the
MSTI.
c Click Submit.
The VLAN is added to the current VLAN Membership column in
the appropriate MSTI row.
3
To remove a VLAN:
a Click the modification icon in the Remove VLAN column.
The VLAN Membership (Remove) page appears.
b Enter the number of the VLANs you want to remove from the
MSTI.
c Click Submit.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Configuring MSTP using Web-based management
231
The VLAN is removed from the Current VLAN Membership
column in the appropriate CIST or MSTI row.
--End--
Configuring CIST ports
Use the following procedure to configure CIST ports.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From the main menu, choose Applications, Spanning Tree,
CIST Port Configuration.
The CIST Port Configuration page appears.
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
Port
The name of the port.
STP Participati
on
Provide information about current participation for a port in
CIST (in this case). In new implementation this can be only
Enabled or Disabled. Enabled means Normal Learning, like in
STP802.1d mode. Disabled means that port doesn’t transmit
any BPDUs and is not under the influence of Spanning Tree
Algorithm (STA).
The four most significant bits of the Port Identifier for a
given Spanning Tree instance. The value can be modified
independently for each Spanning Tree instance supported by
the Bridge. The values that are set for Port Priority must be
in steps of 16.
Priority
Path Cost
The cost of the path to the root as seen from this bridge.
Admin Edge
Status
The administrative value of the Edge Port parameter. A value
of True indicates that this port is assumed to be an Edge port
and a value of False indicates that this port is assumed to be
a non Edge-port.
An Edge port goes directly to Forwarding state without delay.
Edge ports do not receive any Topology Change notifications
and cannot influence the Spanning Tree Algorithm in
detecting network loops. This is a particular port setting, not
a learning mode.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
232
Configuring Spanning Tree Protocol using Web-based Management
Variable
Value
Oper Edge
Status
Can be True or False. This is set to False when AdminEdge
is set to True and the port receives BPDUs (any kind) or
when AdminEdge is set to False.
Admin P2P
Status
The administrative point-to-point status of the LAN segment
attached to this port. A value of 0 indicates that this port is
always treated as being connected to a point-to-point link.
A value of 1 indicates that this port is treated as having a
shared media connection. A value of 2 indicates that this port
is considered to have a point-to-point link if it is an Aggregator
and all of its members are aggregatable, or if the MAC
entity is configured for full duplex operation, either through
auto-negotiation, or by management means.
Oper P2P
Status
This field indicates the operational point-to-point status of the
LAN segment attached to the port. It also indicates whether
a port is considered to have a point-to-point connection. The
value is determined by management or by autodetection, as
described in the AdminP2P object.
Hello Time
Set the hello time on the single or multiple port.
Role
The current role of the port as defined by the Multiple
Spanning Tree Protocol. The role of a port can be Root,
Designated, Alternate, or Backup.
State
The current state of the port as defined by the Multiple
Spanning Tree Protocol. The state of a port can be
Forwarding in one instance, and Discarding (Blocking) in
another.
Protocol
Migration
Force the port to transmit MSTP BPDUs when set to true;
default is false.
Oper Protocol
Version
Display the operational mode of the port.
Configuring MSTI port properties
Use the following procedure to configure MSTI port properties.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From the main menu, choose Applications, Spanning Tree,
MSTI Port Configuration.
The MSTI Port Configuration page appears.
--End--
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Configuring MSTP using Web-based management
233
Variable Definitions
Section
Variable
Value
MST Instance
MSTI
The MSTI instance ID.
Spanning
Tree - MSTI
Port Setting
STP Participati
on
This field specifies whether a port is
participating in the MSTP (802.1s) protocol.
Priority
The four most significant bits of the Port
Identifier for a given spanning tree instance.
You can modify this item independently
for each spanning tree instance the bridge
supports.
Path Cost
The contribution of this port to the cost of
paths towards the MSTI root that include this
port.
Role
The role of the port in the spanning tree
instance.
State
The current state of the port as defined by the
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol. The port
state can be either Forwarding or Discarding
(Blocking).
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
234
Configuring Spanning Tree Protocol using Web-based Management
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
235
.
Configuring ADAC using Web-based
Management
You can configure the settings for Auto-Detection and Auto-Configuration
(ADAC) of Nortel IP Phones using Web-based management.
This chapter contains procedures used to configure ADAC.:
Configuring global ADAC properties
Use the following procedure to configure the global ADAC settings.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From the main menu, choose Application, ADAC, Global
Configuration.
The Global Configuration page appears.
2
From the ADAC list, select Enabled.
3
Choose the Operating Mode.
4
In the Traps Control Status field, enable or disable trap
notifications.
5
Enter the Voice VLAN ID.
6
Choose the Call Server port and unit and the Uplink port and unit
from the lists.
7
Choose the Call Server port and Uplink port from the lists.
8
Click Submit.
--End--
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
236
Configuring ADAC using Web-based Management
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
ADAC Admin State
Enables and disables ADAC (sets the admin
state).
ADAC Oper State
Read-only: Displays the ADAC operating state,
either Enabled or Disabled
Operating Mode
Sets the ADAC operation mode:
• Tagged Frames: IP Phones send tagged
frames.
•
Untagged Frames Advanced: IP Phones
send untagged frames, and the Voice
VLAN is created.
•
Untagged Frames Basic: IP Phones send
untagged frames, and the Voice VLAN is
not created.
Traps Control Status
Enables and disables ADAC trap notifications.
Voice VLAN ID
Sets the Voice VLAN ID.
Call Server Port
Sets the Call Server port.
Uplink Port
Sets the Uplink port.
Configuring ADAC port properties
Use the following procedure to configure the ADAC port settings.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From the main menu, choose Application, ADAC, Port
Configuration.
The Port Configuration page appears.
2
Choose the Auto-Detection setting for each port from the lists
as required.
3
Type the Tagged-Frames Port VLAN ID (PVID) into the
Tagged-Frames PVID box for each port. A value of 0 means
the PVID remains unchanged.
4
Choose the Tagged-Frames Tagging mode setting for each
port from the list.
5
Click Submit.
--End--
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Configuring ADAC MAC address ranges
237
Configuring ADAC MAC address ranges
Use the following procedure to configure the ADAC MAC address ranges.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From the main menu, choose Applications, ADAC, MAC
Range Table.
The MAC Range Table page appears.
2
Type the Low End and High End MAC addresses for the new
range you want to add.
3
Click Submit.
--End--
Variable Definitions
Section
Variable
Value
ADAC MAC
Range Table
Control
Operation
From this field, you can choose to perform
one of the following actions:
•
Reset To Defaults: resets the MAC
address range to default values.
•
Delete All Ranges: deletes all existing
MAC address ranges.
•
Add Range: adds a range specified
by the Low End and High End MAC
Address fields.
•
Delete Range: deletes a range
specified by the Low End and High End
MAC Address fields.
To complete the chosen action, click
Submit.
ADAC MAC
Range Table
Low End MAC
Address
Specifies the low-end address of the range
to add or delete.
High End MAC
Address
Specifies the high-end address of the
range to add or delete.
Action
Deletes the specified MAC address range.
Lowest MAC
Address
Specifies the low-end of the MAC address
range.
Highest MAC
Address
Specifies the high-end of the MAC
address range.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
238
Configuring ADAC using Web-based Management
Configuring ADAC Port Detection
Use the following procedure to configure the ADAC port detection settings.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From the main menu, choose Applications, ADAC, Port
Detection.
2
Enable or disable the MAC Detection and the LLDP Detection
setting for each port.
3
Click Submit
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
MAC Detection
Enables or disables MAC detection
by port, switch or stack. The default
setting is Enabled.
LLDP Detection
Enables or disables LLDP detection
by port, switch or stack. The default
setting is Enabled.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
239
.
Configuring LACP using Web-based
Management
This chapter contains procedures used to configure LACP using
Web-based management.
Configuring LACP using Web-based management
This chapter contains procedures used to configure Link Aggregation using
Web-based Management.
Configuring LACP bridge properties
Use the following procedure to configure LACP bridge properties.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From the main menu, choose Application, Link Aggregation,
Bridge Configuration.
The LACP Bridge Configuration page appears.
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
LACP - Bridge
Configuration
Value
System
Priority
Set system priority to all the LACP enabled aggregators.
Collector Max
Delay
The value of this 16-bit read-write attribute defines the maximum
delay, in tens of microseconds, that can be imposed by the
Frame Collector between receiving a frame from an Aggregator
Parser, and either delivering the frame to its MAC Client or
discarding the frame. This is a read-only value.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
240
Configuring LACP using Web-based Management
Variable
LACP Aggregator
Information
Value
Aggregator ID
The unique identifier that the local system assigns to this
aggregator. This attribute identifies an aggregator instance
among the subordinate managed objects of the containing
object.
Trunk ID
The ID of the trunk associated with this aggregator.
Operate
The combined information of Actor System Priority,
Actor System ID, and Actor Operational Key in Actor
SystemPriority-ActorSystemID-ActorOperationalKey hex format.
Actor Lag ID
The combined information of Actor System Priority,
Actor System ID, and Actor Operational Key in Actor
SystemPriority-ActorSystemID-ActorOperationalKey hex format.
Actor System
ID
The MAC address value that defines the value of the System ID
for the system that contains this aggregation port.
Actor Operatio
nal Key
The current operational value of the key for the aggregation port.
Actor Administ
rative Key
The current administrative value of the key for the aggregation
port.
Partner Lag
ID
The combined information of Partner System Priority,
Partner System ID, and Partner Operational Key in
PartnerSystemPriority-PartnerSystemID-PartnerOperat ionalKey
hex format.
Partner Syste
m Priority
The value that indicates the priority value associated with the
Partner System ID.
Partner
System ID
The MAC address value consisting of the unique identifier for the
current protocol partner of this aggregator.
Partner
Operational
Key
The current operational value of the key for the current protocol
partner of this aggregator.
Configuring LACP ports
Use the following procedure to configure LACP ports.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From the main menu, choose Application, Link Aggregation,
Port Configuration.
The LACP Port Configuration page appears
--End--
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Configuring LACP using Web-based management
241
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
Port
Lists each port on the unit.
Priority
Lists the priority number of each port.
LACP mode
Select to enable or disable the LACP mode.
A/I
A - shows that the port can be part of a LAG; I - shows that the
port is an individual link.
Timeout
Select the timeout duration from the list.
Admin key
The admin value of the Key.
Oper key
The current operational value of the Key.
Aggr Id
The identifier value of the Aggregator that this Aggregation Port
has currently selected.
Trunk Id
The ID of the LAG. The possible values are: 1 - 8.
Partner Port
The index of the port from the partner switch.
Status
Status of the selected port.
Displaying LACP port statistics
Use the following procedure to view LACP port statistics.
Procedure steps
Step
Action
1
From the main menu, choose Application, Link Aggregation,
Port Statistics.
The LACP Port Statistics page appears
--End--
Variable Definitions
Variable
Value
Port
The port numbers. To access ports above
12, select one of the ranges below the
table.
LACPDUsRx
Denotes the number of valid LACPDUs
received on this Aggregation Port. This
value is read-only.
MarkerPDUsRx
Signifies the number of valid Marker PDUs
received on this Aggregation Port. This
value is read-only.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
242
Configuring LACP using Web-based Management
Variable
Value
MarkerResponsePDUsRx
The number of valid Marker Response
PDUs received on this Aggregation Port.
This value is read-only.
UnknownPDUsRx
Indicates the number of frames received
that can
•
Carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type
value (43B.4), but contain an unknown
PDU.
•
Are addressed to the Slow Protocols
group MAC Address (43B.3), but do not
carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type.
This value is read-only.
IllegalPDURx
Denotes the number of frames received
that carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet
Type value (43B.4), but contain a badly
formed PDU or an illegal value of Protocol
Subtype (43B.4). This value is read-only.
LACPDUsTx
Signifies the number of LACPDUs that are
transmitted on this Aggregation Port. This
value is read-only.
MarkerPDUsTx
Displays the number of Marker PDUs
transmitted on this Aggregation Port. This
value is read-only.
MarkerResponsePDUsTx
Indicates the number of Marker Response
PDUs that are transmitted on this
Aggregation Port. This value is read-only.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
NN47205-501 05.01
27 April 2009
Copyright © 2008-2009 Nortel Networks
.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 4500 Series
Configuration — VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Multi-Link Trunking
Copyright © 2008–2009 Nortel Networks
All Rights Reserved.
Release: 5.3
Publication: NN47205-501
Document revision: 05.01
Document release date: 27 April 2009
To provide feedback or to report a problem in this document, go to www.nortel.com/documentfeedback.
www.nortel.com
LEGAL NOTICE
While the information in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable, except as otherwise expressly agreed to in writing
NORTEL PROVIDES THIS DOCUMENT "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED. The information and/or products described in this document are subject to change without notice.
THE SOFTWARE DESCRIBED IN THIS DOCUMENT IS FURNISHED UNDER A LICENSE AGREEMENT AND MAY BE USED
ONLY IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE TERMS OF THAT LICENSE.
Nortel, Nortel Networks, the Nortel logo, and the Globemark are trademarks of Nortel Networks.
Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
IEEE is a trademark of the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising